Home

Owners Manual L:7 :9>I>DC

Contents

1. 87 position parking lamps 91 rear Tod la MPa condal 91 tunnel detection 90 Lighting bulb replacement 335 bulb holder rear direction indicators 338 tardo adidas 339 dipped beam halogen 336 direction indicators 337 main beam Xenon lamp 337 main beam halogen 337 number plate lighting 338 cs t ana 339 LIGAS WINE PR PETRO 86 Loading cargo Al eo oisi iV re bin 292 e TESTEN 292 mounting DONS Petrs ebat idde 293 ee elo C 292 Boe dioe pilfnnculo 2D 44 Locking unlocking e 57 talga E OREA A A 59 Locks automatic locking 57 segno e 57 q HE 57 A 381 Lubricants capacities 381 Main dipped beam see Lightning 87 Main beam automatic activation 88 Maintenance BUSTS FOOTING Sen 363 Making ers SERE anne E 264 11 Alphabetical Index 9 2 11 Alphabetical Index Manual gearbox 121 GSI Gear selector assistance 121 towing and recovery 304 Manual gear positions Geartronic 123 Max roof load secuaces 373 Media Bluetooth ssss 259 m d
2. 94 IAQS Interior Air Quality System 211 Headlamp pattern adjustment a 2 y gt y G Active Bending Lights A 94 IC Inflatable Curtain ns 26 HEAAlAMPS rennes 335 AMADO ci PES 78 Gearbox 121 Head restraint Immobiliser eere 45 STO QU I lE a NER NERO 122 centre seat rear eee 82 Indicator lamps PCC 47 RAS ELU ER 121 OWEN Gosci 82 84 Inflatable cut 26 Gear selector inhibitor 124 Heated washer NOZZICS asias 99 Information button PCC 47 Gear selector inhibitor mechanical disen plo 216 Information display 71 i d d i AA 104 Seen Ll di P ub 104 Infotainment system 234 A 123 O ais A 938 A 215 Glass OVEFV EW P 235 laminated reinforced 101 Heat reflecting windscreen 101 source buttons coccocccccccocconcnnnonarinananos 235 Global opening 210 High engine temperature 298 VOICE CONtrOLL Rasa 271 E 228 High pressure headlamp washing 99 al GAAS pP 228 Tele ars a a TOT 59 HomeLink A 141 Instrument lighting see Lighting 86 Gross vehicle weight 373 Home safe lighting 94 Instrument overview GSI Gear selector assistance 121 E
3. Set time interval after adjustment Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor 04 Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 160 Collision warn Service Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged required Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 167 ay 04 Driver support 04 168 City Safety General City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues amongst other things when changes in the traffic ahead combined with a lapse in atten tion could lead to an incident The function is active at speeds under50 km h and it helps the driver by auto matically braking the car in the event of immi nent risk of collision with vehicles in front should the driver not react in time by braking and or steering away City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the
4. 310 maintenance nnne 310 DPSS SUC 317 puncture repair 321 SDOCIfICallOf 15 ieicacnsicncennriucstatoitornmnetouas 312 speed AUS 313 tread wear indicators 311 tyre pressure monitoring 319 WINS ES conca NM 312 Unlocking from the Inside cicer curre 58 from the outside 57 USB connection eene 256 V Vanity o ET 93 229 Venta lOs T 211 Vibration damper 299 Voice control mobile phone 271 VOlVO SNS sinon menant 77 W Warning lamp adaptive cruise control 154 collision warning system 176 stability and traction control system 146 Warning lamps airbags SRS manne 74 alternator not charging 74 fault in brake system 74 low oil pressure 74 parking brake applied 74 seatbelt reminder 74 ticas eee 74 Warning sound collision warning system 176 Warning symbol airbag system 19 11 Alphabetical Index 9 2 11 Alphabetical Index Warning SYMmbolSs ssusss 72 Warning rlangie 318 Washer fluid fin 343 Washer nozzles heated 99 Washers redr gere 99 washer
5. DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo In order to increase your enjoyment of the car we recommend that The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment instructions and mainte passengers Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner s manual has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements D Table of contents 01 Safety Seatbelts e O arer se cemerman oa 16 ArDIGS ce MURAT NE RTI EE 19 Activating deactivating the airbag 22 Side airbags SIPS bags 24 miarabeCurtain IC MM S 26 WELLES eee AA 27 When the systems deploy 29 SuiImodo JEN S 30 IhlsliSdfety BEE RR E 3 2 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction AA O AS A O 00 Introduction Imporantinomaion eere seers ee Volvo and the environment 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade 44 PiVacyloekind torero 49 Battery replacement remote control key gos M 51 ey ces rive 53 Ese uno unlocking WIil 98 57 enssafety BEls AA 62 Gami S E D 63 Table of contents Gi RS
6. car s seatbelt Type approval E1 04301146 U 2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0 max 13 kg Group 1 9 18 kg Group 1 9 18 kg Group 2 15 25 kg Child seats which are universally approved U Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L Child seats which are universally approved U Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L bag Child seats which are universally approved U Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L Child seats which are universally approved U Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 L Child seats which are universally approved U Child seats which are universally approved U a 01 Safety 01 bag
7. 10 Specifications Type approval CAI Jamaica Thailand Nigeria Mexico Approved for use in Jamaica SMA El IAM2 1 This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communicatios Commission Warning Este equipo opera a titulo secundario consecuentemente debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario Bluetooth module installation information This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC TRONICS INC When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio we shall consider the following points 1 Since IAM2 1 BT PWB US owns its FCC ID IC Number we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not visible The exterior label shall use wording such as either Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID A269ZUA130 IC 700B IAM2101 or Contains FCC ID A269ZUA130 IC 700B IAM2101 2 IAM2 1 BT PWB US complies with requirements of subsections 15 19 a 3 in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C The manual statement 15 19 a 3 is included in User Guide of the product COFETEL No RCPALIA10 0353 10 Specifications Type approval Guy 01 10 0X0 11 Bot
8. Dimensions and weights Dimensions Wheelbase 2076 B Length 4628 C Load length floor folded rear seat 1749 D Load length floor 978 Height 1484 F Load height 658 G Front track H Rear track Load width floor J Width 15884 15785 15855 15752 1082 1865 e I o D o o K Width including door mirrors 2097 L Width including folded in door mirrors 1899 A with 16 wheel B with 17 wheel 01 10 00 17 10 Specifications Dimensions and weights Weights WARNING Kerb weight includes the driver the fuel tank The car s driving characteristics change 10 90 full and all fluids depending on how heavily it is loaded and The weight of passengers and accessories how the load is distributed and towball load when a trailer is hitched see table page 374 influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight Permitted max load Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version i e a car with out extra equipment or accessories This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor respondingly by the weight of the acces sory For information on decal location see page 370 Examples of accessories that reduce load Max gross vehicle weight ing capacity are the Kinetic Momentum Summum equipment levels as well as other G044979 e Max train weight car trailer
9. Speed limiter temporarily exceed the set maximum speed The speed limiter is re activated by one press on IO at which the display s brackets disappear and the car s maxi mum speed is again limited Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal e g for rap idly accelerating the car out of a situation Depress the accelerator pedal fully gt The display shows the stored maximum speed in brackets 5 and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed The speed limiter is automatically re activated after the release of the accel erator pedal and the car s speed is slowed down to below the selected stored maximum speed the display s brackets disappear and the car s maxi mum speed is again limited Alarm for speed exceeded On steep roads the engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed exceeded The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km h provided that none of the buttons or O has been depressed during the last half minute Deactivate To deactivate the speed limiter Press the steering wheel button El gt The display s symbol for the speed lim iter and the set sp
10. 1 Press OK MENU and select Image settings confirm with OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and confirm with OK MENU 3 Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU To return to the settings list press the OK MENU or EXIT The picture settings can be reset to factory settings with the Reset option 7 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Compatible file formats The media player can play back a variety of file types and is compatible with the formats in the following table Dual format double sided discs DVD Plus CD DVD format are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be guaranteed and malfunction may arise If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks all MP3s will be ignored Audio format CD audio mp3 wma Audio format CD audio mp3 wma aac m4a Video format CD video DVD video divx avi asf A Applies to Performance B Does not apply to Performance C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 299 9 06 Infotainment system 06 256 External audio source via AUX USB input General G031959 Connection points for external audio sources An external audio source e g an iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the audio system via any of the conne
11. 12 Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red gt Make sure that none of the black jump lead s clamps comes into contact with the battery s positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead e The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode e The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns e f sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately For more information on the car s battery see page 344 The operating temperature of the gearbox is checked in order to prevent damage to any of the drive system s components In the event of a risk of overheating a warning symbol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message In which case follow the recommendation given Gearshift pattern 5 speed gearbox 1 Only manual gearbox for the D2 model Gearshift pattern 6 speed gearbox The 6 speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever e Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change e Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes Always a
12. Active Xenon headlamps ABL G021143 Headlamp pattern with function deactivated left and activated right respectively If the car is equipped with active Xenon head lamps Active Bending Lights ABL the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety i Option accessory for more information see Introduction The function is activated automatically when the car is started In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explana tory text and a further illuminated symbol Symbol Display Specifica tion Headlamp failure Service required The system is disen gaged Visit a workshop if the mes sage remains Volvo rec ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work shop The function is only active in twilight or dark ness and only when the car is moving The function can be deactivated activated in the menu system MY CAR under My V60 gt Lighting Active Bending Lights or under Settings gt Car settings Light settings gt Active Bending Lights For a description of the menu system see page 203 For headlamp pattern adjustment see page 94 Auxiliary lamps Ifthe car has auxiliary lamps the driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose whether they
13. Cu i 2 ME J G043629 E s D Automatic gear positions Manual gear positions The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica tions P R N D S 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 see page 71 Gear positions Parking position P Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged Apply the parking brake as well as a precaution see page 137 n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed D IMPORTANT The car must be stationary when position P is selected WARNING Always apply the parking brake when park ing on a slope the automatic transmis sion s P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation Reverse position R The car must be stationary when R position is selected Neutral position N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position Drive position D D is the normal driving position Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to D position from R po
14. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly Pull the control The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out Releasing automatically 1 Putthe seatbelt on 2 Start the engine 3 Press the foot brake pedal down firmly 4 Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator gt The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out For safety reasons the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is run ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R Heavy load uphill A heavy load such as a trailer can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline Avoid this by depressing the control while driv ing off Release the control when the engine achieves traction 03 Your driving environment CD Parking brake Replacing the brake linings parking brake an authorised Volvo workshop The rear brake linings must be replaced at a is recommended workshop due to the design of the electric Symbols and messages in the display P Message Read the message on the information display Ron A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this
15. Temperature C Maximum heat ing time sec onds 10 to 85 10 5 to 10 60 40 to 5 180 At temperatures below 20 C or above 60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply The display shows Alcoguard insert power cable In which case connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp 6 is green In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory see page 8 in the section Record ing data After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged in which case carry out all the steps without starting the car The error message is cleared when the car is locked When the Alcolock is installed either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 03 bdo CD 03 Your driving environment 03 a2 Activating the Bypass function e Depress and hold the left hand
16. m Mum 121 BLIS Blind Spot Information System 194 DRIVE Stat SIC 127 All wheel drive AWD 134 FOO Dakar Ehe 1395 Parking brakes crc 187 nte atea 141 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 3 D Table of contents 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment HA gt A O 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving 284 A cen nr E 287 gi e nase eee E AE me ene mene 288 OCDE 292 rca 0 295 NS with atcailer nan 298 lI NO and Heaven A 304 4 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction LT 08 Wheels and tyres Genera m ane Mae near 310 Changing wheels 314 TE Pres Ur corren e M MEL ST Warning triangle and first aid kit 318 Tyre pressure monitoring TPMS 319 Emergency puncture repair TMK 321 Table of contents Gi 011 10 0X0 11 09 Maintenance and service 10 Specifications 11 Alphabetical Index Engine CON Pi es 328 Type designations ter econo eee 370 Alphabetical Index eet 408 EMD S e cater cesar es eens races 335 Dimensions and weights 372 Wiper blades and washer fluid 341 Engine specifications ene 376 ESIS a mm 344 Engineer a eee 378 PUCO AAA CE 350 ligand lubricamisr D 381 AAA PA 361 Ue A
17. ne O 09 132 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD DRIVe Start Stop DRIVE Select P or N to start Start Stop has been deactivated move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START STOP ENGINE button Press Start button The engine will not start automatically start the engine as A 03 normal with the START STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox If a message does not go out following com pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Mj Option accessory for more information see Introduction 133 CD 03 Your driving environment All wheel drive AWD All Wheel Drive is always available 03 G039678 All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels An elec tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin Under normal driving conditions the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain snow and icy conditions 134 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Foot brake
18. 07 General information on fuel Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get ting fuel splashes in the eyes In the event of fuel in the eyes remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Never swallow fuel Fuels such as petrol bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal lowed Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before star ting to refuel Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling The ring signal could cause spark build up and ignite petrol fumes leading to fire and injury D IMPORTANT Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo s guarantees and any associated service agreement This applies to all engines NOTE It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel E85 Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases They are located c
19. 10 20 10 10 09 Maintenance and service 09 amp 0006560500800 Headlamp control Internal relay coils Auxiliary lamps Horn Relay coil in main relay for engine management system Engine control module 5 6 cyl petrol Transmission control module Solenoid clutch A C not 5 cyl diesel Coolant pump 5 cyl diesel Start Stop 20 15 10 15 15 e e Relay coil in relay for solenoid clutch A C not 5 cyl diesel Relay coil in relay for coolant pump 5 cyl diesel Start Stop Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment cold zone Start Stop Start relay Ignition coils 4 cyl petrol Glow control module 5 cyl die sel Ignition coils 5 6 cyl petrol Capacitor 6 cyl Engine control module petrol Engine control module diesel 30 10 20 10 15 amp Valves 1 6 petrol Mass air 10 flow sensor 1 6 petrol Mass air flow sensor D4162T Control valve fuel flow D4162T Mass air flow sensor 5 cyl die 15 sel 6 cyl Control valves 5 cyl diesel Injectors 5 6 cyl petrol Engine control module 5 cyl petrol 6 cyl Solenoid clutch A C 5 6 cyl 10 Valves Engine control module 6 cyl Solenoids 6 cyl without turbo Actuator motors intake manifold 6 cyl without turbo Mass air flow sensor 4 cyl 2 0 petrol 5 cyl petrol Oil level sensor 5 cyl diesel Coolant pum
20. 162 Adaptive cruise control Sometimes the radar sensor is late at Fault tracing and action Warning with Auto Brake functions are not detecting vehicles at close distances e g If the display shows the message Radar operating either nd E PEENE EA A blocked See manual this means that the The following table presents possible causes enicies ont radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked for a message being shown along with the 85 Small vehicles such as motorcycles or and that vehicles in front of the car could not appropriate action vehicles not driving in the centreofthelane be detected can remain undetected This means that in addition to the Adaptive In bends the radar sensor may detect the Cruise Control Distance Warning and Collision wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view CE aton OOOO The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt ice and snow Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals No action Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig No action Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals road surface The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains Wait It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked Symbols and messages in the display Standby mode or active mo
21. 85 Airbag activating deactivating PACOS 22 driver s and front passenger side 20 Key SWIC ON 22 PUB AG ioc nine nes 20 Airbag system casaca 19 All COMGIMIONING veaccascercasexvcovehvctveavenuexcarwess 217 sp Ec T 210 Air conditioning AC 217 Air conditioning system POD all de IRR 334 Air cdistrDUtlOni sectae tix eae ni 211 219 Air quality system IAQS 217 AI VENIS anse 212 PAT E E o mn 63 El SPA 63 alarm SiN caia 64 AMINO iet EN RE 63 checking the alarm nine ie 47 DOCU ATG asar 63 deactivating a triggered alarm 64 reduced alarm level 64 BIGOLOD Ru ne cid 109 Allergy and asthma inducing substances 211 All wheel drive AWD 134 All Wheel Drive AWD 134 Approach light duration 46 94 Audio A 240 o o A aus 234 240 alcoi 235 a nn 234 TUNG ONS A a me untn 240 OVNIs 235 Audio volume eeeeeeeeeeeee 235 ONONE es nue 266 phone media player 266 ring signal phone incon 266 speed noise compensation 240 Auto climate control settings 216 Automatic car washes 361 Automatic gearbox 122 manual gear positions Geartronic 123 towing and recovery 304 Hale e
22. Driver Alert ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Message Time for regular SEPVICE P Ie Text message in the information display When a warning information or indicator sym bol illuminates a corresponding message appears on the information display An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified Press OK to acknowledge and browse between the messages 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Specification TE If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer the message must be read press OK before the previous activity can be resumed Specification Stop safely Stop engine Service urgent Service required See manual Book time for maintenance Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a workshopB Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a workshop Contact a workshop to check the car immedi ately Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible Read the owner s man ual Time to book regular service contact a workshop Time for regular maintenance Maintenance overdue Transmission oil Change nee ded Transmission performance low Time for regular service contact a workshop The timing is deter mined by the number of kilometres driven num ber of months since the last service en
23. General The car is equipped with two brake circuits If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect The driver s brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up For more general information on heavy loads on the car see page 378 Anti lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS Anti lock Braking System which prevents the wheels from locking during braking This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal A short test of the ABS system is made auto matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km h The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activate
24. Important texts advise of a risk of material damage NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam ple Footnote There is footnote information in the owner s manual that is located at the bottom of the page This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral Message texts There are displays in the car that show text messages These text messages are high lighted in the owner s manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey Examples of this are in menu texts and mes sage texts on the information display e g Audio settings Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning information Warning for personal injury A G031590 Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field white text image on black message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the ij Option accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction Important information warning is ignored may result in serious per sonal injury or fatality Risk of property damage Q A o ire lt e o o White ISO symbols and white text image on black
25. Parking brake Parking brake Service required Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrical parking brake is being applied The noise can also be heard during the auto matic function checking of the parking brake If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels If itis applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used i e the brake acts on all four wheels Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta tionary Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low see page 120 Applying the parking brake a PUSH LOCK o o D o Parking brake control apply Press the foot brake pedal down firmly D Press the control gt The combined instrument panel symbol OM starts flashing once there is a constant glow it is applied 3 Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position e When parking the vehicle always engage 1st gear for manual gearbox or put the gear selector in position P for automatic gearbox In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by depress ing the control When the control is released or the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking is interrupted In
26. e o o When topping up the coolant follow the instructions on the packaging It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con ditions Never top up with water only The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate Coolant can be very hot If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature unscrew the expan sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 09 Brake and clutch fluid For capacities and for standards regarding D IMPORTANT water quality see page 381 Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank If the system is not filled sufficiently high temperatures could occur causing a risk of damage to the engine e A high content of chlorine chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system Always use coolant with anti corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50 water and 50 coolant Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water In the event of any doubt about water quality used ready mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec ommendations When changing coolant replacing cool ing system components flush the cool ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready mixed coo
27. 6 Enter the series of numbers PIN code that is shown on the car s TV screen via the mobile phone s keypad and press the mobile phone s button to confirm the selection The external device is now connected to the car and can be controlled from the car x Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 263 06 Infotainment system 06 264 Bluetooth handsfree If connecting the phone is not successful Press EXIT and connect in accordance with Alternative 2 If connecting the media device is not success ful Connect in accordance with Alternative 2 Alternative 2 search for the car via the exter nal device 1 Press TEL If an external device is already connected disconnect it The car searches for previously con nected devices 2 Make the car searchable visible via Bluetooth Press OK MENU select Phone settings gt Discoverable 3 Search for the car with the external devi ce s Bluetooth function see the manual for the external device 4 Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices detected in your external device 5 Enter a PIN code of your choice in the external device via the external device s keypad when prompted for a PIN Then enter the same PIN code via the car s key pad 6 Choose to connect to My Volvo Car from the external device When the connection is established the exter nal device s Bluetooth name is shown in the car s TV screen Now t
28. Certain functions are standard others are optional the range also varies depending on the market Operation Centre console controls Centre console controls for menu navigation Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR Q Press OK MENU to select tick in the high lighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up down among the menu options O EXIT EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is pressed and on the menu level one of the following occurs phone call is rejected current function is interrupted input characters are deleted most recent selections are undone leads up in the menu system Short and long presses can also produce vary ing results A long press leads to the highest menu level Main source view from where all of the car s functions menu sources can be accessed see also page 236 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Steering wheel keypad The keypad may vary depending on market Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up down among the menu options aD Press the thumbwheel to select tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory 2 EXIT see heading EXIT functions page 202 Search paths Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console display screen Search paths to the menu system funct
29. Group 2 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo rear facing turnable child seat 15 25 k Volvo Convertible Child Seat front Volvo Convertible Child Seat front Volvo Convertible Child Seat front 9 facing child seat secured with the facing child seat secured with the facing child seat secured with the car s seatbelt car s seatbelt car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 Type approval E5 04191 Type approval E5 04191 L L L Group 2 3 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest 15 36 kg Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Type approval E1 04301169 Type approval E1 04301169 UF UF UF Group 2 3 Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without 15 36 k backrest Booster Cushion with and backrest Booster Cushion with and backrest Booster Cushion with and 9 without backrest without backrest without backrest Type approval E5 03139 Type approval E5 03139 Type approval E5 03139 UF UF UF 01 Safety 9 o bag Group 2 3 Integrated booster cushion Integrated 15 36 k Booster Cushion available as a fac 9 tory fitted option Type approval E5 04189 B L Suitable for specific child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limit
30. Wipers and washing The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash Deac tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or Il The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out G043524 Washing function Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released Heated washer nozzles The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid High pressure headlamp washing High pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid To save fluid the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle Reduced washing If only approx 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel s display then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind screen and the visibility through it Wiping and washing the rear window iD e I zi
31. cn ceptus asus 72 Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 162 Collision Warning with Auto A 171 179 Distance Alesis 167 Driver Alert Control 183 Lane Departure Warning 186 Tailgate locking unlocking enne 59 Temperature actual temperature 210 Temperature control 216 ilg et aa en 217 Total airing f NetiOn 58 210 Towbar detachable attachment 301 detachable removal 302 Towbar see Towing equipment 299 TOWN ee 304 TOWING EVE ue 305 Towing capathiy esisiini 373 Towing equipment 299 Spec AMOS sr 300 TOWING OVER 305 TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring 319 DANS 298 lo p 298 driving with a trailer 298 SQ gis MN DRM NE 303 Trailer stability assiste 146 Trailer Stability Assist 303 T AS MISSION RT 121 lc RETE 101 Trip COMMUTE fuc 224 Trip Mete cacon clio 75 Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 162 TSA trailer stability assist 146 303 Tunnel detection 90 p o s 219 Type approval remote control key sys A 392 Type designation 370 Tyres direction of rotation 310 driving characteristics
32. e Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner s manual s instructions follow the Service and War ranty Booklet s recommended intervals e If the car is equipped with an engine block heater use it before starting from cold it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea ches normal operating temperature more quickly which lowers consumption and reduces emissions e High speed increases consumption con siderably due to increased wind resistance a doubling of speed increases wind resis tance 4 times e Always dispose of environmentally hazar dous waste such as batteries and oils in an environmentally safe manner Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended Following this advice can save money the planet s resources are saved and the car s durability is extended For more information and further advice see the pages 284 and 384 12 iai Option accessory for more information see Introduction Recycling As a part of Volvo s environmental work it is important that the car is recycled in an envi ronmentally sound manner Almost all of the car can be recycled The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified approved recycling facility The owner s manual and the environment The Forest Stewardship Council
33. kPa kPa kPa 230 230 260 260 260 240 280 230 260 420 240 240 240 230 260 420 280 260 300 260 280 420 260 260 260 260 280 420 Front rear kPa 10 00 11 10 Specifications Electrical system Electrical system The battery capacity is dependent upon the D IMPORTANT The car has a voltage regulated AC alternator equipment level in the vehicle UIN m The electrical system is single pole and uses i battery of the same cold start capacity and the chassis and engine casing as a conductor reserve capacity as the original see the decal on the battery Battery Voltage V Cold start capacity Reserve capacity CCA Cold Cranking Amperes A minutes Petrol Ethanol 12 520 800 100 160 Diesel 12 700 800 135 160 Petrol Diesel with Start Stop function 12 760 135 A Battery type AGM Absorbed Glass Mat must be used in cars with the Start Stop function e The battery s container size should be consistent with the original battery s dimensions e The battery s height is different depend ing on size Eco Start Stop DRIVe For information on batteries in cars with Eco Start Stop DRIVe see page 347 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 391 01 10 OO 111 10 Specifications Type approval Remote control key system Country Sensors tyre pressure monitoring TPMS Tyre Pressure Monitoring 10 Lock system standard Chi
34. nas If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or Il is active see page 78 and if all doors are closed then a warning message is shown in the information display and an audible reminder signal sounds at the same time The warning message clears and the audio reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought back to the car after e adoor has been opened and closed e the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch e the OK button has been pressed Handling the PCC safely If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the car it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked This prevents unauthorised entry However if someone breaks into the car opens the door and finds the PCC it can be reactivated It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care D IMPORTANT Never leave a PCC behind in the car Interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter fere with the keyless drive system Do not place store the PCC near a mobile phone or metal object no closer than 10 15 cm If interference is experienced nonetheless use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key see page 45 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive 02 53 02 Locks and alarm 02 54 Keyless drive Locking 043934 bs Cars with the Keyless system have a p
35. ple who find it difficult to perceive tempera 100 8 10 Minga ture increase because of sensory loss or for Fan any reason have difficulty in managing to use the control of the heated seat Other wise burn injuries may arise If the fan is fully switched off then the air Rear seat conditioning is not engaged which can cause a risk of misting on the windows us Current heat level is shown in the centre console TV screen Fan knob for ECC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed If AUTO is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically The previously set fan speed is disengaged One press on the button gives the highest heat level three orange lamps illuminate in the L centre console TV screen see F 3 figure above 8 Press the button twice for a lower heat level two orange lamps illuminate in the TV screen 2 Not included if 2 stage booster cushion is selected Option accessory for more information see Introduction 23 5 C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Fan knob for ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed Air distribution 05 G043938 Air distribution defroster windscreen Air distribution air vent instrument panel Air distribution ventilation floor The figure consists of three buttons When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the TV screen see
36. the foot brake is used speed falls below approx 30 km h the clutch pedal is depressed the gear selector is moved to neutral posi tion automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button the speed is then set to the last stored speed A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D 04 Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button 1 or by switching off the engine the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the OD button wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 153 ty 04 Driver support 04 154 Adaptive cruise control General information on ACC The adaptive cruise control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead An adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows The driver sets the desired speed and time interval to the car in front When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car the speed is automatically adapted to that When the road is clear again the car returns to the s
37. 00 i ii Electhiocal a nr a 391 Iypeapprova me trm mm ntn ce A 392 Symbols in the SA mne rear Pr cana Paene Pay m i s 404 368 01 10 SPECIFICATIONS S 0110 OO 11 10 Specifications Type designations Label location poc ane o JULII LN nn G046325 01 10 0X0 11 10 Specifications Type designations Knowing the car s type designation vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer The labels shown in the owner s manual are 10 not provided as exact reproductions of regarding the car and when ordering spare oce ihe tar m cos NOW parts and accessories their approximate appearance and location Type designation vehicle identification in the car The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label number maximum permissible weights ats in question in your car codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number The label is visible when the right rear door is opened Label for parking heater Engine code and engine serial number Q 6 cyl B 4 cyl 5 oyl Label for engine oil O Gearbox type designation and serial num ber Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Car s identification number VIN Vehicle Identification Number Further information on the car is presented in the registration document 01 10 0X0 111 10 Specifications
38. 10 swana BTA REGISTERED No BTA TA 2010 220 Croatia E HEISE G044550 404 10 Specifications Symbols in the display General There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car The symbols are divided into warning indicator and information symbols Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found For more information on symbols and text messages see pages 72 74 and 200 A Red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car At the same time an explanatory text is displayed in the information display D Yellow information symbol illuminates in combination with text in the information dis play when a deviation in any of the car s sys tems has occurred The yellow symbol infor mation can also illuminate in combination with other symbols Symbols in the display Indicator and warning symbols in the combined instrument panel 74 n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Low oil pres sure Parking brake Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning safety mode 74 137 139 19 74 16 74 74 74 136 19 30 74 75 125 Indicator and information symbols in the Oo lt i o o el Q
39. 299 Automatic IDE KIA 59 Automatic relocklhgis oen aes 57 Auxiliary heater 223 AUX DEDI mnt 235 256 AWD All wheel drive 134 BARS a 80 front Seat lowering 80 Backrest rear seat lowering 83 Bad AGE 293 Dades 344 391 MAIN eNaANCe ss 344 remote control 280 remote control key PCC 51 Start ASSISTANCE ici ierit net 120 symbols on the battery 345 warning symbols io rns 345 Bioethanol ESS 289 Blind spot BLIS Lecuna 194 A NOR 194 Bluetooth HAS TES de 262 SOS er eee eee nee 259 microphone OI 265 streaming audio taccaicatcentnacnaivedecstanccess 259 transfer call to mobile 265 Bonhet 0peniNd issues 328 Brake and clutch fluid 333 o PPP 91 EEE Am o 135 anti lock braking system ABS 135 Drake DIE sonsaina 91 brake SYSTEM 135 electric parking brake 137 Emergency Brake Assistance EBA 135 emergency brake lights 91 filling brake fluid 334 HangbDrake 5 137 symbols in the combined instrument o PS 136 Bulbs see Lighting enini 335 C Calls gre epulas SE S 264 se 264 Camera sensor eene 169 178 CAC TP 361 Car care leather upholstery
40. 363 Cargo area cargo COMO nica pt 296 KONTIN occasion odiosas 93 a A D M UU RIDE DE 292 mounting points eneee 293 Sale OMIS a is 296 safety net 295 Cargo COVE usina 296 Car UPRO Sacando 363 76 jT 361 Catalytic converter 288 ECON naaa 305 AAPP 252 Centre COrBOle sessions 202 Chassis settings 226 Checking and topping up the coolant 332 Checking the engine oil level 329 o Po 31 child safety locKs oorr rni ncs 38 child seats and side airbags 24 location in the CA nn 31 SATE COPA A A 31 Child safety locks 62 Eee EE en 21 CHI SEALS c 31 integrated two stage booster cushion 36 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 38 recommended 32 size classes for child seats with the ISO FIX fixture system 38 upper mounting points for child seats 41 Cigarette lighter socket 228 City Safety P 168 11 Alphabetical Index 2 11 Alphabetical Index Cleaning automatic car washes 361 car WaS Maia aorta bla 361 rpm e 362 seatbellS arica 364 He o AA nn 363 Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP 211 Climate CONTO a a visae d rosabb Rud mida 210 STELE a E T Q 210 SENS OMG MMC meer 210 Clock STI 75 CO emissions asciga erba deris edad unido vido ad 384 Gal Y 30 Collision warning
41. Below 30 km h Only fol lowing Only with Queue Assistant The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over and hold the car but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll e The driver must brake himself herself The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km h without a vehicle in front within the activation distance approx 30 metres n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Distance Warning NOTE General Distance Warning Distance Alert is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car in the same direction No dis tance information is provided for oncoming slow or stationary vehicles G045221 1 Orange warning lamp An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu minates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre set value the speed of the driver s vehicle is not
42. I 106 AO OI 46 POS MING citer o 362 E g 103 Remote control key system type appro Position parking lamps 91 electrically retractable 104 val 392 lt A 104 Power Seat 81 Wei Remote Start ERS LLL 114 Powerdiit gearbox 125 304 MATENO CC 105 Boreee a 107 Rear window defrosting 104 ROSAS te OAMI ops Lo a cc 101 o m 217 Reset SUO poer A N Simp Lo EI cat neat Recommendations during driving 284 Retractable power door mirrors 104 nM MMC M E Recommended child seats table 32 Reverse gear inhibitor 122 PRO COW IY M 306 ile GIG ANIC EE 362 picis M dina 334 o Road sign information 148 a Assist 159 Refuelling eee 287 Roof UGU ASS nsc sen rene fuel cap 287 oof load max weight 373 Queue Assistant 159 fuel filler flap electrical opening 287 RUSIDIOOING 363 62 11 Alphabetical Index S Safely grille E 296 Sale MOD rro 30 Safely Medi 295 Seat see SlalS oooocccccccccnccncccnnnnninancnncnnnnns 80 Seatbelt cn 18 seatbelt tensioner 18 Seatbelt reminder 18 A aisetoraniee Ra pdiete bien 16 DOBS en ee te A 80 head restraints rear 82 Fie
43. One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows see pages 45 and 58 The doors and the tailgate are locked To interrupt closing press the lock button again WARNING If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual sliding interior sunscreen The sunscreen slides back auto matically when the sunroof is opened Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it Pinch protection The sunroof s pinch protection function is trig gered if it is blocked by an object during auto matic closing If blocked the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous posi tion Wind deflector The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD General information on the alcolock Functions Operation The alcolock s function is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the Santery e Alcolock indicator lamp 4 shows battery sta influence of alcohol Before the engine can be ius started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he she is not under the influence of alcohol Alcolock calibration takes place in Indicator lamp Battery status 03 accordance with each market s limit value in 4 reo
44. RS 03 Your driving environment 04 Driver support 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Instruments and controls 68 DSTC Stability and traction control sys Menus and messages 200 VONO O I M Em T7 i NN 146 Menu source MY CAR 202 EAS A cocer NE TED SE 78 Road sign information RSI 148 Climate control eee me mes 210 A ep 80 Speed limiter 150 Fuel driven engine block heater and pas Steering wheel 85 SE control 152 senger compartment heater 220 Er A A 86 Adaptive cruise control 154 zsnnal heater Ml 223 Wipers and washing s 98 Bist ance Weng 165 lip o rmpute me M8 RR 224 Windows rearview and door mirrors 101 SEG ee sa A 168 Adapting driving characteristics 226 Coe i sae 106 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Comfort inside the passenger compart B dostriani iections 2 173 IS AAA AAA 227 Pos Bhi ie eee 107 Driver Alert SYSTEM nn 181 DISSDCk EM A 109 Driver Alert System DAC ccccsccsessseeeeoe 182 Staging the ei inc EE Wis Driver Alert System LDW s 185 Seed the ie PRES us ESI assist SYSt ERR D 188 EE ine engine eemal battery 120 Parkfassist camera ERE 191 cnp es
45. SPORT combined instrument panel Meaning Page Fault in the ABL system Emissions sys tem Fault in the ABS system Rear fog lamp on Stability system DSTC Trailer stability assist Stability system sport mode Engine pre heater diesel Low level in fuel tank Information read display text Main beam on 2 90 12 72 136 2 91 72 147 303 12 147 12 U2 227 UZ 12 90 10 Specifications Symbols in the display Symbol Meaning Page Mil Symbol Meaning Pace Ml Symbol Meaning CSS E Left hand direc 72 EX Adaptive cruise 162 167 ym Speed limiter 150 D tion indicators control Distance mU Warning Distance Em 70 Right hand re Alert direction indica Camera sensor 171 tors Adaptive cruise 162 E Laser sensor mear control 183 186 DRIVe Start 72 127 131 START A Stop Auto Brake Dis 167 Adaptive cruise 157 165 Dia tance Warning 171 179 T A 319 control Distance Distance Alert City Warning Distance Safety Collision Alert i i Other information symbols in the armor combined instrument panel Adaptive cruise 157 165 Fuel driven engine 221 Warning Distance passenger com Adaptive cruise 152 Alert partment heater control 156 162 Adaptive cruise 156 ABL system 90 4 Adaptive cruise 162 control 20 control Adaptive cruise 162167 Radar sensor 162 NN Fuel filler flap r
46. Thumbwheel browse between menus and options in the trip computer list RESET resets The trip computer s menu is in a variable loop One of the menu options is a blank display it also marks the beginning end of the loop Functions If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip com puter can be reactivated Acknowledge the warning message by pressing OK To change unit for distance and speed go to MY CAR gt Settings gt System options gt Distance and fuel units see page 202 Average speed Average speed is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every second The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds When the car is stationary appears on the display Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting Reset using RESET There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel driven supplementary and or parking heater has been used Km to empty tank The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity The display shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance For more information on how fuel consumption can b
47. accessories can negatively affect the car s electrical system Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car s computer system Volvo therefore recommends that you always con tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety security and comfort serv ices If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a change of owner it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car Contact the call centre by pressing the ON CALL button in the car or contact an author ised Volvo workshop See also Changing the security code in the owner s manual for Volvo On Call i n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Important information If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury Laser sensor This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which transmits laser light It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when han dling the laser sensor The following two labels in English are fitted directly on the laser sensor unit INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MAGNIFIERS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Max average power 45mW Pulse dur
48. and detailed information see page 262 The menu options under Naviga tion commands show several examples of available voice com mands only with Volvo s navi gation system RTI installed Voice user setting Default setting User 1 User 2 Here there is the option to create a second user profile an advant age if more than one person shall use the car system regularly Default setting gives factory set tings n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Voice training User 1 User 2 With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver s voice and pronunciation A number of phra ses are presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud When the system has learnt how the driver talks the presentation of the phrases stops Following which e g User 1 can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the system shall listen to the right user Voice output volume A volume control appears on the screen at which point proceed as follows 1 Adjust the volume with the thumbwheel 2 Test listen using OK 3 Use EXIT to store the setting and the menu is switched off Voice POI list Edit list The number of facilities is exten sive and varies depending on market Maximum 30 favourite facilities can be stored in this list Menu option Voice POI list is only shown if Volvo s navigation system RTI is installed For more information on
49. centre console see page 203 1 Inflate the tyres to the required pressure and select key position I or Il 2 Select the menu system MY CAR to open the menus to Settings gt Tyre pressure Select Calibrate tyre pressure Press OK 5 Start the car and drive at least at 40 km h for a total of at least 1 minute and check that the message disappears gt Calibration is complete Rectifying low tyre pressure If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in the display 1 Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres 2 Inflate the tyre s to the correct pressure 3 Drive at least at 40 km h for a total of at least 1 minute and check that the message disappears Deactivating activating tyre pressure monitoring The engine must not be running when tyre pressure monitoring is activated deacti vated The settings are made with the control in the centre console see page 203 1 Select key position I or Il 2 Select the system MY CAR to open the menus to Car settings Tyre pressure 3 Select Tyre pressure system and press OK ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure monitoring TPMS 319 08 320 08 Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure monitoring TPMS gt AX is shown in the display if the system is activated the option disappears if the system is deactivated Recommendations e Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to al
50. extra cooling heating etc the more the batteries must be charged increased fuel consumption When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start Stop function is disen gaged Temporarily reduced Start Stop function due to high current take off means e The engine starts automatically without the driver depressing the clutch pedal manual gearbox e The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his her foot off the foot brake pedal automatic gearbox AL i oS G044747 A Left hand arive car B Right hand drive car 1 Battery for starting 2 Support battery The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for starting A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems an author ised Volvo workshop is recommended 2 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position 3 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 345 D IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the Start Stop function may temporar ily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance fora description
51. left trol module Primary fuse 5 for fuses 16 20 Infotain Q B lidia ie men Control panel driver s door 20 13 Power seat driver s side 20 o ji O Control panel front passen 20 14 Power seat passenger side 20 ger door gt gt Ww Option accessory for more information see Introduction 355 396 Box A Function a 15 T c p p amp amp e amp amp amp N Q Infotainment control module Audio control unit ampli fier Digital radio TV Audio Telematics Bluetooth Sunroof Interior lighting roof Climate sensor Damper motors air intake 12 V socket tunnel console Seat heating rear right Seat heating rear left Seat heating passenger side Seat heating driver s side 5 10 15 al 15 15 Js IS 15 COCA Parking assistance Park ing camera Towbar control module e 30 BoxB Function A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction BLIS AWD control module 15 Active chassis Four C 10 Rear window wiper JS Interior lighting Driver s 125 door control panel power windows Power seats front Remote controlled garage door opener Information display DIM 5 Adaptive cruise control 10 ACC collision warning sys tem Interior lighting Rain sensor 7 5 Steering wheel module CS pox Function LA 8 000 oco 6 6 6 Central l
52. mised or eliminated by high loads e Never load cargo above the backrest Always secure the load During heavy brak ing the load may otherwise shift causing injury to the car s occupants Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading unloading long items Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position and the car could then move off Front seat The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load see page 80 Roof load Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers e Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured Lash the load securely with retaining straps e Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers Put the heaviest objects at the bottom e The size of the area exposed to the wind and therefore fuel consumption increase with the size of the load e Drive gently Avoid quick acceleration heavy braking and hard cornering The car s centre of gravity and driving cha racteristics are altered by roof loads For information on maximum permitted roof load including load carriers and any space box see page 373 To simplify loading in the cargo ar
53. music players and mobile phones For the C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 230 Comfort inside the passenger compartment D IMPORTANT Max socket is 10 A 120 W if one socket is used at a time If both sockets in the tunnel console are used simultaneously 7 5 A 90 W per socket is applicable If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sock ets no other current consumer must be connected to the other one The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo For information on the use of Volvo s recommended temporary emergency puncture repair TMK see page 321 Electrical socket in cargo area For more information see page 293 iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 AN General information id cH IRI SUNG cs cleenccaccscecteccanesetuccnsecenastectseouscnses 234 A clo A 245 METE OUR een cur ASTERMMCR 292 External audio source via AUX USB input 256 Media Erao a 259 Aa ci AAA 262 VOICE r cogmilion mobile phone a a 271 JP ECT NEM RE on rosa 2 3 Remote control Meere e em E ca fee gare a a gx 2 9 232 Option accessory for more information see Introduction INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 06 Infotainment system 06 234 General information on infotainment General The infotainment syste
54. ning for at least 20 seconds and the speed of the car must be 20 km h or higher G045972 Light switch in position AUTO Activate deactivate AHB by moving the left hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release Deactivation when main beam is on means that the lights 6046503 a Headlamp control and stalk switch When AHB has been activated the symbol E illuminates in the combined instru ment panel s display When main beam has been activated the ED symbol also illumi nates in the combined instrument panel Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice snow mist and dirt Do not attach or fit anything to the wind screen in front of the camera sensor as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera dependent systems If the message AHB temporary unavailable is shown in the combined instrument panel s display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam However the headlamp control may nevertheless be in posi tion Em The same applies if the message Windscreen Sensors blocked and the symbol are shown The sym bol goes out when these messages are shown AHB may be temporarily unavailable e g in sit uations with dense fog or heavy rain When AHB becomes available again or the wind Screen sensors are no longer covered the message goes out and the symbol illu minates AHB is an aid for us
55. parts and surfaces Do not scrape or rub stains Never use strong stain removers A special cleaning agent avail able from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car s rust proofing and should therefore be checked reg ularly To avoid the onset of rust damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips scratches and marks on the edges of wings doors and bumpers Materials e primer for e g plastic clad bumpers there are special adhesive primers availa ble in spray cans e base coat and clear coat are available in spray cans or as touch up pens sticks e masking tape e fine sand paper 1 If required Colour code Paint code VOLVO CAR CORPORATION G044980 e Code for car s colour It is important that the correct colour is used For product decal location see page 370 2 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch up pen stick Car care Repairing minor paint damage such as stone chips and scratches G021832 Before work is started the car must be clean and dry as well as at a temperature above 15 C 1 Apply a pie
56. see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Radio AM FM Tuning The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the transmitter being far away Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located Automatic tuning 1 Press RADIO turn TUNE until the desired wavelength AMI FM1 etc is shown press OK MENU 2 Holdin Cl in the centre console or in the steering wheel keypad The radio searches for the next previous available station Station list The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur rently receiving This enables you to find a sta tion when you drive into an area where you do not know the radio stations and their frequen cies To go to the list and select a station 1 Select the desired wavelength FM1 or FM2 2 Turn TUNE one step in either direction This displays the list of all stations in the area The currently tuned station is indi cated with enlarged text in the list 3 Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station from the list 4 Confirm your selection with OK MENU n i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 245 06 Infotainment system 06 e The list only shows the frequencies of stations that are
57. the alarm disarmed unintentionally If the car is unlocked with the remote control key and the alarm is disarmed but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes then the alarm is automatically re armed The car is relocked at the same time Remote control key not working If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key e g if the key s battery is discharged the car can be unlocked dis armed and the engine started as follows 1 Open the driver s door with the detachable key blade see page 54 gt The alarm is triggered the alarm indica tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds co o iD o o 2 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch gt The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out 3 Start the engine Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered the following hap pens e A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery e The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Reduced alarm level To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e g if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors The procedure is the same as with the tempo rary disengaging
58. x o A R WARNING The mirror on the driver s side is the wide angle type to provide optimal vision Objects may appear further away than they actually are Storing the position The mirror positions are stored in the key mem ory when the car has been locked with the remote control key When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver s seat adopt the stored positions when the driver s door is opened The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Car key memory Personal settings in key memory For a description of the menu system see page 203 Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position 03 Your driving environment CD 03 OD 03 Your driving environment 03 104 Windows rearview and door mirrors after approx 10 seconds or sooner by press ing the L and R button Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original posi tion after a short t
59. 0 160 280 230 260 260 260 235 45 R 17 SST 160 260 260 280 280 215 55 R 16 0 160 230 230 260 260 260 235 45 R 17 160 280 240 300 260 215 50 R 17 0 160 240 240 260 260 260 T6 B6304T4 235 40 R 18 160 300 240 320 280 0 160 280 230 260 260 260 235 45 R 17 SST 160 280 280 300 300 388 01 10 00 11 10 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure km h Front Rear Rear Front rear Me kPa kPa kPa kPa 230 230 260 260 T4 B5204T8 P 215 55 R 16 0 160 260 T5 B5204T9 P 215 50 R 17 T5 B4204T7 235 45 R 17 160 260 240 280 260 T5 B5254T12 P 235 40 R 18 D4 D5204T3 O 160 230 230 260 260 260 D3 D5204T7 235 45 R 17 SST D5 D5244T11 160 260 260 280 280 D5 D5244T15 E ad 389 01 10 0 111 10 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Tyre size Speed 10 km h 215 55 R 16 0 160 235 45 R 17 160 D4 AWD D5244T17 215 50 R 17 0 160 D5 AWD D5244T15 235 40 R 18 160 0 160 235 45 R 17 SST 160 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the bar unit beside the SI unit Pascal 1 bar 100 kPa C DRIVe for certain markets D Only certain markets E FWD eoa All engines tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets 390 Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure Front Rear Rear
60. 0 see page 78 Activation deactivation can be per formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine provided that no door is opened To activate the child safety locks 1 Start the engine or choose a key position higher than O 2 Pressthe button in the driver s door control panel gt The information display shows the mes sage Rear child locks Activated and the button s lamp illuminates the locks are active When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear e windows can only be opened with the driv er s door control panel e doors cannot be opened from inside The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started General Activated alarm is triggered if e adoor the bonnet or the tailgate is opened e a movement is detected in the passenger compartment if fitted with a movement detector e the car is raised or towed away if fitted with a tilt detector e the battery s cable is disconnected e the siren is disconnected If there is a fault in the alarm system the infor mation display shows a message In which case contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment air currents are also regis tered For this reason the alarm i
61. 365 Panel Ouro store icons 86 Panic TUDGLHOLD uauees cu enu oap ssemteteissnsennennes 46 Park assist camera 191 Parking assistance 188 parking assistance sensors 190 Parking Drake vainas 137 PARNE N E se rm mens 220 battery and 0e 220 parking on a Ml osas is 220 time SQ GUNG NR esse 222 Passenger compartment 227 Passenger compartment filter 210 Passenger compartment heater TG OAV CE 220 PCC Personal Car Communicator FUNGUO STRIP rm 45 PA a 46 47 Pedestrian protection 173 11 Alphabetical Index 9 Petrol Grade 288 R fuel filler flap manual opening 287 Phone gla ss 287 COM unidos Dm 263 Radar sensor 154 Relay fuse box see Fuses 350 HAUTES TTE TOT 160 ANG SIN een nc anne 262 Remote control occcccccccccccececcccccccccccce 279 incoming CAS 264 FUG sore 245 battery replacement ccssessesesesee 280 MARINO AA 264 AM FM P 245 11 phone DOOR ee nus 266 DAD p an ie 249 emote conta Hamer tk phone book shoricut 266 Rain sensor 98 DRASS ju receiving a Call 265 EN Remote control KEY 44 register phone 263 S battery replacement 51 mm MM 271 co D 338 detachable key blade 48 Be Diet Sun 108 Rearview and door mirrors UNCON S RENTE ne ea 45 COMPA MN NP
62. A AE System S DVV er ninttenenenenenccecenenocsecennstenenccscernonnse 185 RE o rU ERIT TC ES REL Cr ann sra mat 188 RANK ASSIST CAM RA ime me ee en eect E TE eA 197 BLIS Blind SpotfoimatiomSysten re annua tle 194 5 144 Option accessory for more information see Introduction DRIVER SUPPORT ty 04 Driver support 04 146 DSTC Stability and traction control system General information on DSTC The stability and traction control system DSTC Dynamic Stability amp Traction Control helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car s traction The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel eration Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans fers power from the driving wheel that is spin ning to the one that is not Engine drag control EDC EDC Engine Drag Control prevents involun tary wheel locking e g after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces Involuntary wheel locking while driving can amongst other things impair the driver s ability to steer the ca
63. Acar with D2 D3 D4 or D5 engine in com bination with a 6 speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear 07 For more information and further advice see the pages 12 and 384 Never switch off the engine while moving such as downhill this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maxi mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km h Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water During driving in water maintain a low speed and do not stop the car When the water has been passed depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function e Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud e Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time this could cause electrical malfunctions D IMPORTANT Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter In depths greater than 25 cm water could enter the transmission This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems In the event of the engine stalling in water do not try restart tow the car from the water to a workshop an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended Risk of engine breakdown
64. Ben Benjaminsson Carl Carlsson Search contacts using the text wheel Character list Changing the input mode see table below Phone book To search for or edit a contact go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Phone book gt Search n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 gt gt 267 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree Thereis no text wheel for High Performance so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this 1 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used 2 Continue with the next letter and so on The result of the search is shown in the phone book 3 3 To change the input mode to numbers or special characters or to go to the phone book turn TUNE to one of the options see explanation in the table below in the list for 06 changing the input mode 2 press OK MENU 123 Change between letters and ABC numbers with OK MENU More Change to special characters with OK MENU gt Leads to the phone book 3 Turn TUNE to select a contact press OK MENU to see the saved numbers and other infor mation A short press on EXIT deletes an input char acter long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters By pr
65. Facilities and Voice recognition see the Navi gation system s owner s manual Audio settings Climate settings p 235 Automatic blower adjustment Normal High Low Recirculation timer On Off Automatic rear defroster On Off Interior air quality system On Off Reset climate settings All menus in Climate settings are given original factory settings Favourites FAV Volvo On Call Described in a separate manual Information Number of keys VIN number DivX VOD code Bluetooth software version in car Map and software version Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav igator see separate manual p 44 p 370 p 255 p 261 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 05 209 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 210 Climate control General Climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas senger compartment The air conditioning system AC can be switched off but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart ment and to prevent the windows from mist ing it should always be on Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed humidity and solar radiation etc in and around the car The system incl
66. G044513 The battery contains cor rosive acid An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner it contains lead G040861 09 Maintenance and service Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover e re eo o o o G040864 E Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away RNIN Connect and remove the positive and neg ative cables in the correct order Detach the black negative cable Detach the red positive cable Detach the ventilation hose from the bat tery Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp Move the battery to the side and lift it up 346 Option accessory for more information see Introduction LI Cross stay and plenum chamber cover G045405 A Cars with R Design have a cross stay that must be removed before the main battery can be replaced 1 Remove the plenum chamber covers on the right and left hand sides Prize carefully with a plastic knife or similar Loosen and remove the screws one on the right and one on the left hand side that hold the cross stay Remove the cross stay Now the main battery can be removed in accordance with the previous section Fitting the cross stay takes place in the reverse order Battery NOTE Tighten the screws to 30 Nm Check the torque with a torque wrench G
67. IMPORTANT Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal The gearbox could then overheat For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing see page 304 Text message and action In some situations the display may show a message at the same time as a symbol is illu minated a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment QD Gearboxes 03 125 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes Transm overheat park safely Transm overheat brake to hold Transm cooling let engine run stant engine speed Significant pulling in the car s traction No drive due to overheated gearbox A For fastest cooling run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car s elec tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate The table s examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten tionally to prevent damage to one of the car s components WARNING If a warning symbol combined with
68. If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held down for more than approx 1 minute it is blocked and disabled To be able to reacti vate Cruise Control the car must be stop ped and the engine restarted In certain situations cruise control cannot be activated Then the display shows Cruise control Unavailable see page 162 Set time interval Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the display as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time interval One line corre sponds to approx 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approx 3 seconds To set change the time interval e Increase or decrease with the steering wheel keypad s thumbwheel or the but tons for cars without Speed limiter At low speed when the distances are short the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably Note that small intervals only allow the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise The number of lines for the 123456 selected time interval is T1 shown during the setting itself and for several seconds after N wards Then a smaller scale version of the symbol is shown to the right of the dis play The same symbol is also show
69. O Off Off n ff Doors unlock 2 e Temporary LH traffic p 94 EXISTE Unlock confirmation light Ov Driver door then zm Off all Off Keyless entry i i p Temporary RH traffic All doors Approach light duration EET porary Any door Off On Doors on same 30 sec Off side 60 sec Both front doors 90 sec Active bending lights E On Reduced Guard 60 EDEN mr Home safe light duration P 94 Off Activate once E 30 sec m Ask when exiting 60 Sec Auxiliary lights ls O Side mirror settings p 103 90 sec i Off Fold mirrors Tilt left mirror Tilt right mirror gt gt C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 206 Menu source MY CAR Tyre pressure system Warns if tyre pressure is too low Calibrate tyre pressure Steering wheel force Low Medium High Reset car settings All menus in Car settings are given original factory settings Driver support systems p 319 p 226 Collision Warning On Off Warning distance Long Normal Short Warning sound On Off Lane Departure Warning On Off On at start up On Off Increased sensitivity On Off p 173 p 185 City Safety On Off BLIS On Off Distance Alert On Off Driver Alert On Off System options Time The instrument panel clock is set here p 146 p 9 and 168 p 194 p 165 p 182 Dp 75 n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Time format 12h 24h Screen saver
70. OK MENU If there is no contact stored on the speed dial number then an option is shown to save a contact to the selected speed dial num ber Receiving a vCard It is possible to receive a vCard to the car s phone book from other mobile phones other than the one currently connected to the car In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode for Bluetooth The function is activated in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book gt Receive vCard Memory status Memory status of the car s phone book and the connected mobile phone s phone book can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book Memory status Delete phone book The car s phone book can be deleted this is carried out in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book Clear phone book i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 gt gt 269 o 06 Infotainment system 06 270 Bluetooth handsfree Deleting the car s telephone book only dele tes contacts in the car s telephone book Contacts in the mobile phone s phone book are not deleted Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings gt Bluetooth software version in car iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone The infotainment system s voice recognition allo
71. OK MENU gt Alist of all available countries is shown 5 Turn TUNE to the desired country e g Sweden and press OK MENU An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre i Option accessory for more information see Introduction set is shown When the scan is com plete a message is shown and the pic ture is shown A preset list max 30 pre sets has now been created andis avail able To change channel see page 276 The scan and preset storage can be cancelled with EXIT Channel management The preset list can be edited You can change the order of the channels that are shown in the preset list TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list The TV channel positions can also vary in the preset list To change the order in the preset list go in TV mode to TV menu Reorganise presets 1 Turn TUNE to the channel you want to move in the list and confirm with OK MENU The selected channel is highlighted 2 Turn TUNE to the new location in the list and confirm with OK MENU gt The channels change places with each other After the preset channels max 30 come all the other channels available in the area It is pos sible to move a channel up to a place in the preset list Save the available TV channels as presets If the car has been moved within the country
72. On Off The TV screen s current content fades out after a period of inac tivity and is replaced by a blank screen if this option is selected The current screen content returns if any of the TV screen s buttons or controls are actuated Language Selects language for menu texts Show help text On Off Explanatory text for the display screen s current content is shown with this option selected p 75 p 202 Distance and fuel units MPG UK MPG US km l 1 100km Temperature unit Celsius Fahrenheit Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system Volume levels Voice output volume Front park assist volume Rear park assist volume Phone ringing volume Reset system options All menus in System options are given original factory settings Voice settings p 224 Voice tutorial This menu option OK provides spoken information about how the system works 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 05 gt gt O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 208 Voice command list Phone commands Phone Phone call con tact Phone dial num ber Navigation commands Navigation Navigation repeat instruc tion Navigation go to address General commands Help Cancel Voice tutorial The menu options under Phone commands show several exam ples of available voice commands only with a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone installed For more
73. Swept Com code kW rpm rpm volume pression 10 litres ratio D5 D5244T11P 158 4000 215 4000 420 1500 3250 5 81 0 93 15 2 400 1654 D5 D5244T15E 158 4000 215 4000 440 1500 3000 5 81 0 93 15 2 400 16 5 1 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 370 B DRIVe for certain markets C Only certain markets D Manual gearbox E Automatic gearbox 01 10 OO 111 10 Specifications Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor mally high oil temperature or oil consumption Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys e towing a caravan or trailer e in mountainous regions e at high speeds e in temperatures colder than 30 C or hot ter than 40 C The above also apply to shorter driving dis tances at low temperatures Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions It provides extra protection for the engine Volvo recommends Castrol oil products D IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied O
74. TP symbol indicates that the function is activated If the preset station can 2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 3 Factory settings send traffic information then this is shown by TP glowing brightly in the TV screen otherwise TP will be grey A Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu gt TP Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans mitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source Activate deactivate in FM mode by select ing one of the options under FM menu gt Advanced settings gt EON e Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close e Distant interrupts if the station trans mitter is far away even if there is a lot of static TP from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa tion from the selected station or all stations within the RDS network Goin FM mode to FM menu Advanced settings gt Set TP favourite to change 06 Infotainment system 06 06 Infotainment system 06 News This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active A Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu News settings gt New
75. The doors can still be opened from the inside G043881 Manual locking of the door Not to be mixed up with child safety locks see page 62 Use the remote control key s detachable key blade to turn the knob see page 48 The door is blocked against opening from the outside B The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking 57 02 Locks and alarm 02 58 Locking unlocking A door s knob control only locks that particular door not all doors simulta neously A manually locked rear door with an activated manual child safety lock can not be opened from either the outside or the inside see page 62 A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button From the inside Central locking Central locking All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver s door and the passenger door Press one side of the button to lock the other side to unlock Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways e Press the central locking button Fall Press and hold at least 4 seconds to also open all the side windows simultaneously e Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one
76. UIC RENT D 215 lowering the front backrest 80 lowering the rear backrest 83 power SELS sis 81 Securing loads Loading 293 A A T7 Service position 341 Service programme 328 Set time interval sse 165 ode ADAS erciscundae 24 Signal input external 235 290 SIPS DAS nn 24 sio Mir gere 290 SOOE filter ll rossi 290 Spare wheel 314 SLIM CONTO NETTES 146 Spin control TICO viroriorircnacrcrcins 146 SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres 320 Stability and traction control system 146 Stability SVSLITL ss suia tege roca ak aria iin 146 BO UNS OPC On UU Mud dirtu MUNI INE 363 Start ASSISTANCE cac sese arteria 120 Steering force speed related 226 Steering force level see Steering force 226 Steering lock decern rnit nnns 114 Steering wheel 85 REY DAC A 85 152 203 236 keypad adaptive cruise control 156 steering wheel adjustment 85 Stone chips and scratches 365 Storage spaces in the passenger compart MENE rc E 227 Sunroof opening and closing 107 DINGH DEOTGOHBOFIL eie tait ias 108 SUN SN maison 108 ventilation position 107 Sunscreen sunroof eene 108 SUTTON irnos 234 240 OVD PSP 147 indicator Symbols iie traen 72 warning SVMOOIS
77. Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended 04 wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 179 as 04 Driver support Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection Wind screen Sensors blocked Radar blocked See man 04 ual Collision warn Service required Specification The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 160 Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 180 Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can
78. Your driving environment 03 128 DRIVe Start Stop tem s fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system Auto stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto stop Declutch set the gear lever in M neutral position and release the clutch pedal the engine is switched off Stop the car with the foot brake A and then keep your foot on the pedal the engine stops automat ically A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox The AUTO START symbol on the information display illumi nates as verification and reminder that the engine is has stopped automatically AUTO START Auto starting the engine Conditions With the gear lever in neutral posi M tion Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal the engine starts Engage a suitable gear and continue the journey The following option is also avail M able on a downhill gradient Release the foot brake and let the car move off the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace Release the foot pressure on the A foot brake the engine starts automatically and the journey can continue A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill gradient to start the engine automatically the HSA function means that the car does not roll backwards HSA Hill Start Assist means that the press
79. Your driving environment QD Instruments and controls 03 79 OD 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 16 the button Each click scrolls 1 minute In order to change quickly hold in the click position In connection with a message the clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol see page 200 Setting the clock in MY CAR In addition to the previous manual mechanical method the clock can also be set in the menu group MY CAR for more information see page 202 Time 10 03 AM OK 1 Locate Settings gt System options gt Time 2 The cursor is located in the first box for Hour Press OK the box is activated 3 Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK the box is deactivated 4 Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute A and press OK the box is activated B 5 Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK the box is deactivated 6 Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and press OK the setting is complete The menu option Settings System options gt Time format selects the 24h or 12h system AM PM RSI The function RSI Road Sign Identification helps the driver to see road signs containing information on current speed that a motorway or road is starting ending and when overtaking is prohibited For detailed information on RSI see page 148 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Volvo Sensus General G
80. accessories such as Towbar Load carriers Space box Audio system Auxiliary lamps Max front axle load GPS Fuel driven heater Safety grille Car 14 Max tear de load pets Cargo cover Power seats etc Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer O Equipment level taining the kerb weight of your own partic ular car Max load See registration document Max roof load 75 kg 373 01 10 OO 11 10 Specifications Dimensions and weights Towing a and towball load 10 Coa a Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg B4164T3 Manual MMT6 1600 15 T3 B4164T3 Automatic MPS6 1600 15 us B4164T Manual MMT6 1600 79 Ju B4164T Automatic MPS6 1600 T5 s B5204T8 Automatic TF 80SD 1800 90 T4F B4164T2 Manual MMT6 1600 15 T4F B4164T2 Automatic MPS6 1600 15 T5 B4204T7 Manual MMT6 1800 90 T5 B4204T7 Automatic MPS6 1800 90 5s B5204T9 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 Tas B5254T12 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 T6 AWD B6304T4 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 D2 D4162T Manual MMT6 1300 a D2 D4162T Automatic MPS6 1300 15 D3 D5204T7 Manual M66 1600 75 D3 D5204T7 Automatic TF BOSD 1600 15 01 10 00 11 10 Specifications Dimensions and weights EXENTOS Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg D4 D5204T3 Manual M66 1600 75 ll D4 D5204T3 Automatic TF 80SC 1600 75 D4 D5204T3 Automatic TF 80SDE 1600 75 D4 AWD D5244T17 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 D5 D5244T11 Manual M66 1600 75
81. affected Operation lo o 9 x lo O EN Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model 2 The display shows either dash symbol 2 or 3 they are never shown simultaneously Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which case the function is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Warning distance For a description of the menu sys tem see page 202 Set time interval Z Controls and display for time interval Time interval Increase decrease Press up to increase down to decrease e Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support ay 04 165 Y 04 Driver support Distance Warning Limitations The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warn Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a specific time display as 1 5 horizontal lines interval ing system For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations se
82. and lower the key blade into its slot IMPORTANT b 3 Lightly press the key blade You should Avoid touching the battery and its terminals hear a click when the key blade is locked with your fingers as this could damage their in functionality Option accessory for more information see Introduction 51 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC D IMPORTANT 02 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way 52 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Keyless lock and ignition system only PCC General G017871 The keyless drive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked driven and locked with out the need for a key You simply have to have the PCC with you The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car e g when your hands are full Both of the car s PCCs incorporate the Keyless function Additional PCCs can be ordered see page 44 PCC range In order to open a door or the tailgate a PCC must be no more than approx 1 5 metres from 1 Personal Car Communicator see page 47 the car door handle or tailgate This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car The red rings in the preceding illustration indi cate the range covered by the system s anten
83. box The fuses in C are located under A On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses e Fuses 1 7 and 42 44 are of the Midi Fuse type and must only be replaced by a work shop e Fuses 8 15 and 34 are of the JCASE type and should be replaced by a workshop e Fuses 16 33 and 35 41 are of the Mini Fuse type 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended o ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in cargo area Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox PTC element air preheater Headlamp washers Windscreen wipers 50 60 60 60 100 20 30 6060666006 amp Parking heater Ventilation fan ABS pump ABS valves Headlamp levelling Active Xenon headlamps ABL Primary fuse for the central elec tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox ABS Speed related power steering Engine control module Trans mission control module Air bags Heated washer nozzles 40 40 20
84. check the engine oil level top up if necessary If the symbol illumi nates and the oil level is normal contact a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied The symbol flashes during application and then changes over to a constant glow A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen Head the message on the information display Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle SRS SIPS or IC systems Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked Volvo recom mendis that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates the brake fluid level may be too low Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 333 If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake force distribu
85. described in a separate owner s manual RADIO AM FM DAB 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment MEDIA CD DVD AUX USB fast winds disc tracks or searches for the Bluetooth TV next available radio station 2 Volume press to raise or lower the audio TEL Bluetooth handsfree volume MY CAR Car settings see page 202 CAM Park Assist Camera see page 191 Keypad without thumbwheel gt 06 ap Short presses scroll between disc tracks or preset radio stations A long press 7 Does not apply to DAB gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 297 2 35 Y 0 2 mi Mindanoa Way oJ IO My Favourite Came AUTO CLIMATE G046530 Play Hicks m rard m ondo The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back 1 Main source button 2 Normal view 3 Shortcut view 4 Quick view 5 Menu view General information on infotainment Select main source by pressing a main source button 1 RADIO MEDIA TEL To navigate in the source s menus use the controls for TUNE OK MENU or EXIT Use TUNE to scroll in the menu select the highlighted menu bar with OK MENU or go back with EXIT In some cases it is possible to access a shortcut menu by pressing the active source s main source button 1 For Menu overview see page 241 If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
86. down gently on the wider of the two Automatic locking pa Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise a E ee Tieren The doors and tailgate are locked automati The keyhole is horizontal in the locked i cally when the car starts to move position 2 nih His outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate The function can be activated deactivated in E gt Pull out the key blade g the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt e Unlock by carrying this out in reverse IMPORTANT Car settings gt Lock settings Automatic door locking For a description of the menu dud dp cui QUES Rene system see page 202 For information on privacy locking see rear hatch lock just gently press the page 49 rubberised panel e Do not place the lift force on the rubber Glovebox Tailaate panel when opening the rear hatch lift nm 9 the handle Using too much force may Manual opening damage the electrical contact for the rubber panel eo N re Y o The glovebox can only be locked unlocked using the remote control key s detachable key blade For information on the key blade see Rubber plate with electrical contact page 48 TN 02 Locks and alarm 02 60 Locking unlocking Unlocking with the remote control key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the remote control key s EX button The lock indicator on the instrument panel stops flashi
87. downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick down func tion 03 Your driving environment CD 03 OD 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes Geartronic does not permit downshifting kick down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged When kick down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine Mechanical gear selector inhibitor The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P R N and D Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys tems Parking position P Stationary car with engine running Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov ing the gear selector to another position Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position P To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 78 Shiftlock Neutral N If the gear selector is in N posi
88. driving week is recom mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life D IMPORTANT Never use a quick charger to charge the battery D IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain ment may be temporarily disengaged and or the message in the information display about the main battery s state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable following the connection of an external battery or bat tery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance fora description of how the cable clamps must be attached 09 Maintenance and service Battery 09 Symbols on the battery Avoid sparks and naked Replacing the main battery Use protective goggles flames Removal First of all Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched this is because the car s electrical system Risk of explosion needs to store the necessary information to control modules Further information in the AB owner s manual Must be taken for recy Store the battery out of cling the reach of children
89. e PEE EES 85 left hand drive 68 right hand drive 70 aite e 85 Instruments and controls 68 H Interior lighting see Lighting 92 Interior rearview mirror 105 Handbrake sinirinin 137 automatic dimming 105 Hazard warning flashers 92 Intermittent wiping eese 98 iPod connection 256 Kerb i o rH 373 i 44 Key Did S 48 Keyless drive 53 113 Keyless start keyless drive 53 113 Keypad in the steering Ir mE 85 152 203 236 Key positos TR 78 L Eo A E S 370 Laminated glass 101 Lamps see Lighting 335 Lane Departure Control 185 Laser SO NE TR 9 Leather upholstery washing instructions 363 DO acuso ence cea MN EDT 335 Active Xenon headlamps 90 approach light duration 46 94 automatic lighting passenger compart MENT eL 93 bulbs specifications 339 COMOIS PP A 92 display HAINE 0 86 headlamp levelling 86 home safe lighting 94 in passenger compartment 92 instrument lighting 86 main dipped beam
90. e The car downloads the mobile phone s phone book and only displays this phone book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con nected e The car also has a built in phone book This contains all the contacts stored in the car irrespective of which phone was con nected when saving them These contacts are visible for all users regardless of the mobile phone that is connected to the car If a contact is saved in the car then the symbol m is shown in front of the con tact in the phone book Changes made from the car to a record in the mobile phone s telephone book will result in a new record in the car s telephone book i e changes will not be saved to the phone From the car this will now look like you have double records with different icons Note also that when a shortcut num ber is saved or a change to a contact is made this will result in a new record in the car s phone book All use of the phone book requires that the Les symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode 266 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Bluetooth handsfree The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each paired mobile phone The phone book can be copied automatically to the audio system during each connection Activate deactivate the function in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings Download phone boo
91. either be switched on at the same time or individually e Driver Alert Control DAC see page 182 e Lane Departure Warning LDW see page 185 A switched on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km h The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km h Both functions use a camera which is depend ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side WARNING The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y Driver Alert System 04 181 ay 04 Driver support 04 182 Driver Alert System DAC The DAC Driver Alert Control function is intended to attract the driver s attention when he she starts to drive less consistently e g if he she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver s steering wheel move ments The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly ean The camera sensor has certain limitations see page 178 The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete riorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roa
92. h Camera location next to the opening handle i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 181 ay 04 Driver support 04 192 Park assist camera Light conditions which shows the driver the path the car will The camera image is adjusted automatically take even when turning according to prevailing light conditions Because of this the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car the lines on the display show the route the car will take not the trailer Keep the camera lens clear of dirt snow and The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car s electrical system ice to ensure optimum function This is par ticularly important in poor light The parking camera is deactivated Park assist lines automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used IMPORTANT Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing G041224 Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis played for the driver The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel movement n n n n
93. heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed Pro ceed as follows 1 Press OK 2 Usethe thumbwheel to scroll to the text Park heat timer 1 or 2 gt The text ON flashes on the display 3 Press RESET gt The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF A timer started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section Direct start and immediate stop see page 222 Clock timer The heater s time is connected to the car s clock NOTE All timer programming will be cleared if the car s clock is reset Additional heater General information about the additional heater In cold climate zones an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi cient heating in the passenger compartment Fuel driven additional heater A fuel driven additional heater is fitted in cars with diesel engines The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater s automatic start sequence can be switched off if required 1000km to empty tank Gp OK button
94. heater com bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car s battery is recharged adequately to replace WARNING the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis Warning label on fuel filler flap Fuel which spills out can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before starting to refuel Check the information display to see that the parking heater is switched off When it is running the information display shows Park heat ON Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Operation 12 34 1000km to empty tank PE G046221 La ji LE ap OK button e Thumbwheel RESET resets selects For more information on the information dis play and OK see page 200 Symbols and display messages When one of the timer s settings or Direct start is activated the infor mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates while the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illumi nated symbol The table shows symbols and display texts that appear Figure 2 in the symbol means the second climate control system in the car where the normal climate co
95. important to keep the car clean The car s rust proofing needs to be checked regularly and touched up if necessary in order for it to be maintained Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod ucts recommended by Volvo Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt Each inlay mat is secured with pins Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom mended by your Volvo dealer Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent available from authorised Volvo dealers is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery D IMPORTANT Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo s leather upholstery is chromium free and is treated to preserve its origi
96. is also manufac tured in one of the cleanest and most resource efficient plants in the world Volvo Car Corpo ration has global ISO certification which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis sion of the greenhouse gas carbon dioxide It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con sumption For more information read under the heading Reducing environmental impact Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the con cept Clean inside and out a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com partment via the air intake A sophisticated air quality system IAQS Inte rior Air Quality System ensures that the incom ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out side The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter The incoming air is moni tored continuously and if there is an increase in x Opt
97. means that a fault has arisen Read the message on the information display Park brake not fully A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released Try to apply and release the brake released If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended Note A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message gt gt CD 03 Your driving environment Parking brake Symbol Meaning Action Parking brake not applied 03 Parking brake Service required e If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged manual gearbox or the gear selector must be in position P automatic gearbox A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied Try to release and apply the brake If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged A fault has arisen Try to apply and release the brake If the fault persists after a few attempts Visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended General HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can remotely control up to t
98. menu gt Show presets The audio system s DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB standard Radio text Some radio stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion is shown on the TV screen The function is deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Show radio text Only one of the functions Show radio text and Show presets can be acti vated at a time If one of them is activated when the other is already activated then the previously activated function is deactivated automatically Both functions can be deac tivated Advanced settings DAB to DAB link DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio can go from one channel with poor or no recep tion to the same channel in another channel group with better reception There may be a certain delay when changing channel group There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available The function can be activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB linking Wavelength DAB can be transmitted on two wavelengths e Band lll covers most areas e Band available only in a few areas By selecting for example Band II on its own channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band III and LBand have been selected It is not certain that all channel groups will be found Wavelength
99. mode 2 Dial either the desired number or speed dial number see page 269 Or in normal view turn TUNE to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call reg ister for all calls For information on the phone book see page 266 3 Press OK MENU The call is interrupted with EXIT Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system s range The connection to the mobile phone can be manually broken in phone mode under Bluetooth handsfree Phone menu Disconnect phone For more information on connection see page 263 The handsfree function is deactivated when the engine is switched off and the door is opened When the mobile phone has been discon nected an ongoing call can be continued by using the mobile phone s built in microphone and speaker Even when your mobile phone has been manually disconnected some mobile phones may automatically couple up to the last handsfree unit connected e g when a new call begins Remove the device A connected mobile phone can be deregis tered and removed This is performed in phone mode under Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device 2 Only Keyless Drive Making and receiving calls Incoming call Press OK MENU to answer the call even if the audio system is in e g RADIO or MEDIA mode Refuse or end with EXIT Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that c
100. never shown simultaneously i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment Activating and setting the speed To set the Cruise control Press the steering wheel button f the symbol illuminates in the display The display s symbol shows that the cruise control is set in standby mode To activate the Cruise control At the desired speed press the steering wheel button or The current speed is stored in the memory the display s symbol changes to show the selected speed e g 100 without brackets Ce iS Only when the symbol f When the symbol M changes TEES to f the radar sensor has T1 A detected a vehicle with car is illuminated is the distance to the vehicle in front regulated by the cruise control Adaptive cruise control Changing the speed To change the stored speed e Adjust with short presses on or every press gives 5 km h The last presses made are stored in the memory If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the button then it is the car s current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control e Inactive mode the button D has the same function as but results in a lower increase in speed 1 km h
101. not each button individually However individual but tons can be reprogrammed see the following section Programming individual buttons 1 Depress the two outer buttons on HomeLink and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash 2 Release the buttons HomeLink is now set in so called learn mode and is ready to be reprog rammed see section Programming HomeLink on page 141 Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink button proceed as follows 1 Depress the required button and do not release 2 When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash after approx 20 seconds start with step 1 in section Programming HomeLink on page 141 For more information or to leave comments about HomeLink visit www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 03 Your driving environment CD i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 143 DSTC Stability and traction control system 146 Road sign intormation A Wit RE 148 ler MSI EE s 190 gp Gruise Contro lemme pneus Woe X Adaptive cruise Control mire TT CLIE IIIS 154 Distance Wa TO eiii ennt eh er nc d ta kei cda 165 COS MENTE tec AM 168 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection 173 BUG AS cede sencoaderscdsseecsceueeecoadencessedccccbaeecceues 181 Driver Alert System DAC 182
102. number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1 Audio settings Phone call volume The phone call volume can only be changed during a call Use the steering wheel keypad or turn the VOL control Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place the audio system volume is controlled as usual by turning VOL If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be muted automatically Acti vate deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio media 06 Ring volume In phone mode go to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring volume and adjust by turning VOL Press OK MENU to hear the audio volume Press EXIT to save 3 Not supported by all mobile phones Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring sig nals that can be selected in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Ring signals Ring signal 1 etc For some mobile phones the ringtone on the phone connected will not be switched off when one of the inbuilt signals for the handsfree system is used In order to select the connected phone s ring signal go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume gt Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal Phone book There are two phone books These are merged into one in the car and are displayed as a single phone book in the car
103. of deadlocks see page 60 02 Locks and alarm PC Instruments and CONTIOIS cccceccececcececccceccacecccecccececeeccaeeceaesneuesneaeans 68 Volvo A ne ne ed ZEE MISERERI A 17 o RS ne aaa a ee nt 78 SSI LS 80 Steering A o seen ene e nennen nh ann rn nnns n anna aras 85 AAPP o H 86 WIpers and WASTING 2 dernieres 98 Windows rearview and door mirrors eee 101 COS E E het Gr 106 Power SUNS OOP iii AAA eee EEEE EIEEEI RENEE EErEE 107 Ms 109 Starting the A A ino ai id 113 Starting the engine SEUA oi ici aeuo aenea c rur v cosas 118 Starting the engine external battery 120 EIL OT o n 121 DRIVERS OR Rm 127 Allauriieeltelrivie A VID itierccseri haere onere nenne nnne nennen nane nhan nra 134 Oo bra ko NN arum comm CEN em secure ccn t 135 Parking Drake a a eet Uh 157 y HomeLinkS SSSR AA 141 66 dd Option accessory for more information see Introduction YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT CD 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 e o Ge o o Left hand drive CC OOO 6060 e 80 00 O Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Cruise control Horn airbags Combined instrument panel Menu audio and phone control START STOP ENGINE button Ignition switch Display for infotainment and menus Door handle Control panel Hazard warni
104. of how the cable clamps must be attached 09 Maintenance and service Battery 09 If the battery has become so discharged that everything is black and in principle the car does not have all the normal electri cal functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery charger then the Start Stop function will be activated It will then be possible for the engine to be auto stopped but in the event of an auto stop the Start Stop function may fail to auto start the engine due to inade quate capacity in the battery The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto start after an auto stop At an outside temperature of 15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3 4 hours is recom mended The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger If this is not possible then the recommen dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged For more information about recharging the battery see the section Battery in the chapter Maintenance and service 09 Maintenance and service General All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to pro tect the car s electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading If an electrical component or function does no
105. order to reduce the risk of scratches from washing Do not spray directly onto the locks e lfnecessary use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces Note that the surfaces must not then be warmed up by the sun e Wash using a sponge car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water e Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo e Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces e Dry the car using a clean soft chamois or a water scraper If you avoid allowing water droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the risk of water stains that may need to be polished away is reduced WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot D IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functional ity Clean them regularly when refuelling for example Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non scratching sponge instead Outside lighting such as headlamps fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens This is normal all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt dust and salt residue on wiper blades as well as insects ice etc on the windscreen impair the service life of wiper blades 09 Maintenance and service Car care 09 For cle
106. pedal as long as necessary If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi ble follow the Volvo service intervals as speci 03 Your driving environment CD 03 CD 03 Your driving environment Foot brake fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet see WARNING page 328 If and EN illuminate at the same D IMPORTANT time there may be a fault in the brake sys tem The wear on the brake system s compo nents must be checked regularly If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor 03 mal at this stage drive carefully to the near Contact a workshop for information about est workshop and have the brake system the procedure or engage a workshop to checked an authorised Volvo workshop is carry out the inspection an authorised recommended XMONORSDISSQOBHONGCOMIOe Me If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further Symbols in the combined instrument before topping up the brake fluid panel The reason for the loss of brake fluid must Symbol Specification be investigated Ro Constant glow Check the brake fluid level If the level is low fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started There was a fault in the brake system s ABS function when the engine was last running 03 Your driving environment Q
107. player RADIO MEDIA lo 2 ABC 3 DEF Centre console control panel Disc insert and eject slot 7 MEDIA button activates last active media source If you are already in a media source and press the MEDIA button then a short cut menu is shown for commonly used menu options E Disc eject Input of numbers and letters 3 Select the disc tracks folders or navigate through menu options by turning TUNE Confirm your selection or go to the menu for the selected media source by pressing OK MENU Fast forward reverse and change disc track or chapter The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files e Pre recorded CD discs CD Audio e Burned CD discs with audio and or video files e Pre recorded DVD video discs e Burned DVD discs with audio and or video files For more information about the supported for mats see page 255 If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only applies to DVD discs E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel
108. plete the programming of a device with rolling code usually a garage door opener Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver 5 6 Depress and release the receiver s pro gramming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period While the receiver s programming button is still flashing press the button on HomeLink being programmed and hold it depressed for approx 2 seconds and then release it Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the programming Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls Press the programmed button and hold it depressed until the garage door alarm system etc is activated may take several seconds Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink if required If the ignition is switched off HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver s door has been opened n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction If programming problems persist contact HomeLink on www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 Resetting the HomeLink buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink buttons at the same time
109. protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated passenger air bag 1 For information on activating deactivating the airbag see page 22 COO The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips 01 Safety 9 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision 9 01 Safety 01 Inflatable Curtain IC Properties Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof The hook is only designed for light clothing not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example Do not screw or install anything onto the car s headlining door pillars or side panels This could compromise the intended pro tection Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas N N N e Y a jo The inflatable curtain IC Inflatable Curtain is a Do not load the car higherthan 50 mm under part of SIPS and the airbags It is fitted in the the top edge of the door windows Other headlining along both
110. reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp left hand side Reading lamp right hand side Interior lighting All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when e the engine has been switched off and the car s electrical system is in key position O e the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started CC OO Lighting Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con sole Rear roof lighting o D A o o Rear roof lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting and passenger compart ment lighting is switched on and off respec tively when a side door is opened or closed Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed Vanity mirror The lighting for the vanity mirror see page 229 is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed Lighting cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment light ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment e Off right hand side pressed in automatic lighting deactivated e Neutral position aut
111. rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec tors On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision In such sit uations the ABS and DSTC systems will pro vide best possible braking force with main tained stability When your own car is reversing City Safety is temporarily deactivated City Safety is not activated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly e g when parking Driver commands are always prioritised which is why City Safety M does not intervene in sit uations where the driver is steering or acceler ating in a clear manner even if a collision is unavoidable 04 Driver support 04 ty 04 Driver support 04 City Safety When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice snow and dirt see
112. safely always rests with the driver The system is designed to work most effec tively when driving in dense traffic on multi lane highways When a camera 1 has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp 2 illuminates with a constant glow The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system If for example the sys tem s cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown on the information display In such cases check and clean the lenses 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model i Option accessory for more information see Introduction If necessary the system can be switched off temporarily see the section Activate deacti vate Blind spots G017834 A approx 9 5 m and B approx 3 0 m Activate deactivate We Es e Button for activating deactivating BLIS is activated when the engine is started The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated The system can be deactivated activated after starting the engine with one press on the BLIS button Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which cas
113. settings gt PTY settings gt Seek PTY To finish searching press EXIT To continue searching for another broad cast of the selected programme types press on or 241 Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can be shown on the TV screen A Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Show PTY text Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion can be shown on the TV screen Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Show radio text Automatic frequency update AF The function selects the strongest transmitter for the set station In order to find a strong transmitter the function may in exceptional cases need to search the entire FM wave length Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt Alternative frequency Regional radio programmes REG This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low The symbol REG shows that the func tion is active A Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu gt Advanced settings REG Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings Thereset is carried out in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt Reset all FM settings Volume control programme types The interrupting pr
114. should be deactivated or switched on off simultaneously with the main beam see page 204 Position parking lamps G043766 Headlamp control in position for position parking lamps Turn the headlamp control to the position for position parking lamps number plate lighting is illuminated at the same time When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind This takes place irrespec tive of what position the headlamp control is in or what key position the car s electrical system is in Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 135 Rear fog lamp Button for rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and can only be switched on in combination with main dipped beam Press the button for On Off The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off OA Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop x Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driv
115. sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and hand drive car backs against the backrest Seatbelts must be secured The car has an airbag to supplement the pro tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver s side It is folded up into the centre of the steer ing wheel The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the 1 airbag in the event of a collision Location of the front passenger airbag in a right hand drive car G043845 hE ee 01 Safety 9 01 WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life S 01 Safety Activating deactivating the airbag Key switch off PACOS General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch PACOS Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch For information on how to activate deactivate see under the heading Activating deactivating Key switch off switch The switch for the pass
116. steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter The symbol for the speed limiter is illu minated on the instrument panel dis play 2 Whenthe car is moving at the desired high est possible speed Press one of the steer ing wheel buttons or until the instru ment panel display shows the desired maximum speed The speed limiter is then active and the display 5 shows the maximum speed selected and the maximum speed stored in the memory When stationary 1 Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter 2 Scroll with the button until the instru ment panel display shows the desired maximum speed The speed limiter is then active and the display 5 shows the maximum speed selected and the maximum speed stored in the memory Changing the speed To change the stored speed e Adjust with short presses on or every press gives 5 km h The last presses made are stored in the memory To adjust 1 km h e Hold the button depressed and release when the instrument panel s display shows a point 5 at the desired maximum speed Temporary deactivation standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode Press 0 gt The display shows the stored maximum speed in brackets 5 and the driver can 150 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y
117. storage space under the cargo area floor hatch Securing the net cassettes G043916 The two part safety net cassette is secured on the rear of the backrest The narrowest cas sette is secured on the left hand side seen from the tailgate 1 Fold the rear seat s backrest forward see page 83 2 Align the cassette s anchor rails in front of the backrest attachment lugs ED 3 Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs 4 Fold back and lock the backrests e Removing the cassettes takes place in reverse order d the safety net eee 5 Ll Pull the net up from the cassettes The net is self locking after about 1 minute if the rear seat s backrests are raised FD Pull up the right hand section of the net using its strap 2 Insert the rod in the mounting on the right hand side and then press it forward the rod locks in with a click eb Pull out the rod s telescope section and click it in on the other side p Pull up the left hand safety net and hook it into the rod e Folding up takes place in reverse order The net can also be used when the rear seat s backrests are folded forward Removing the net cassettes 1 Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in accordance with the procedure in the sec tion entitled Using the safety net but in reverse Fold the whole backrest forward 07 Slide the cassettes out until they loosen from the anchor rails Store the cassettes in their compart
118. store a function in the FAV button 1 Select a main source e g RADIO MEDIA 2 Select a wavelength or source AM Disc etc a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 239 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment 3 Press and hold the FAV button until the favourites menu is shown 4 Turn TUNE to select an option from the list and press OK MENU to save gt When the main source e g RADIO MEDIA is active the stored function is available via a short press on FAV General audio settings Press SOUND to access the audio settings menu Bass Treble etc Scroll forward with SOUND or OK MENU to your selection e g Treble Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the setting with OK MENU Continue pressing SOUND or OK MENU to access other options 06 e Surround Can be set to the On Off posi tion When On is selected the system selects the setting for optimal sound repro duction Normally DPLI and Pt then appear in the TV screen If the recording is made with Dolby Digital technology then playback will take place with this setting DO DIGITAL then appears in the TV screen 9 Only Premium Sound Multimedia 100nly when Surround is activated 11Not Performance When Off is selected 3 channel stereo is available e Bass Bass level e Treble Treble level e Fader Balance between the front an
119. sweep over the bonnet and or windscreen After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows e Using MY CAR on the centre console dis play screen with its menu system search and locate Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems gt City Safety Select the Off option For more information on the menu system MY CAR see page 202 However the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started regardless of whether the system was enabled or dis abled when the engine was switched off WARNING The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually To enable City Safety again e Follow the same procedure as for disa bling but select the On option Limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night However the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality or none at all in e g heavy snowfall or rain dense fog dust storms or snow flurries Mist dirt ice or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the function Low hanging objects e g a flag pennant for projecting load or accessories such as auxili ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity The
120. tains anything other than compatible music files Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 gt gt 257 9 06 Infotainment system 06 258 External audio source via AUX USB input The system supports mobile media compli ant with USB 2 0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi mum of 254 subfolders files in every folder The top level which can handle up to 1000 subfolders files is an exception to this When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec ommended This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick USB hub It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB devices simultaneously Selection of USB device is made in USB mode under USB menu gt Select USB device MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system For use in the system an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device Mass Storage Device mode iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player s con nection cable ORC The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod When an iPod is used as audio source the car s infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player s own menu structure Compat
121. that there is no reception for all TV channels One possible reason may be that a border has been crossed and that the system is set to the wrong country In which case change to the right country in accordance with Searching TV channels Preset list see page 276 n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Remote control The remote control can be used for all func tions in the infotainment system The remote Function control s buttons have the same functions as Key the buttons in the centre console or steering LER E Front TV screen wheel keypad bx When using the remote control first press the NAV Change to navigation GIAI TAI MEDIAT TEU remote control s button qo to position F CONBCONCREC Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver RADIO Change to radio source AM which is located to the right of the INFO button FM1 etc DVD EXIT see page 235 in the centre console MEDIA Change to media source Disc l TV etc Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cameras remote controls for accessories etc in the glove compartment or other com partments Otherwise they may injure peo ple in the car in the event of sudden braking 14 TEL Change to Bluetooth hands free Scroll fast rewind change track or a collision di gt Play pause 06 Do not expose the remote control to direct e Stop sunlight e g on the instrument pane
122. the cap G043413 D IMPORTANT Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking The cover must not be opened Check the level frequently The fluid does not require changing The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks For capaci ties and recommended fluid grade see page 381 If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed it can still be steered Air conditioning system Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluores cent tracing agents Use ultraviolet light when looking for leaks Volvo recommends that you contact an author ised Volvo workshop WARNING The air conditioning system contains pres surised refrigerant R134a This system must only be serviced and repaired by an author ised workshop 09 Maintenance and service 09 General WARNING All bulbs are specified see page 339 The fol lowing list contains locations of bulbs and The cars electrical system must be in key position 0 when replacing bulbs see other light sources that are specialised or page 78 unsuitable for changing except at a workshop e Active Xenon headlamps ABL Xenon D IMPORTANT lamps Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with Direction indicators door mirrors K your fingers Grease and oils from your fin Approach lighting door mirrors gers are vaporised by t
123. the catch e DOS releases i Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil 2 AF when the remote control key is in Il position Move the catch to the left and open the The appearance of the engine compartment may or when the engine is hot bonnet The catch hook is located vary depending on engine variant between the headlamp and grille see illus y on Coolant expansion tank Checking the engine oil e Power steering fluid reservoir WARNING Engine oil dipstick Check that the bonnet locks properly when ocd Radiator Filling engine oil Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid located on the driver s side Battery Relay and fuse box 1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick 5 cyl diesel 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment Volvo recommends Castrol oil products When driving under adverse conditions see page 378 IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristi
124. the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly Operating without auto Move one of the controls up down gently The power windows move up down as long as the control is held in position Operating with auto Move one of the controls up down to the end position and release it The window runs auto matically to its end position Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking see pages 46 and 58 Windows rearview and door mirrors Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly 1 Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second Release the button briefly Raise the front section of the button again for one second WARNING Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 81 Door mirrors Door mirror controls Adjusting 1 Press the L button for the left hand door mirror or the R button for the right hand door mirror The light in the button illumi nates 2 Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre 3 Press the L or R button again The light should no longer be illuminated A Pa E J A j le e
125. the valve cap 13 As soon as possible drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre Rechecking the repair and pressure 1 Reconnect the equipment 2 Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge e f it is below 1 3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed The journey should not be continued Contact a tyre centre e f the tyre pressure is higher than 1 3 bar the tyre must be inflated to the pres sure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 388 1 bar 100 kPa Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres sure is too high WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 3 Make sure the compressor is switched off Detach the air hose and cable Refit the dust cap The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop 08 Wheels and tyres 08 08 Wheels and tyres 08 324 Emergency puncture repair TMK Check the tyre pressure regularly Volvo recommends that you drive to the near est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace ment repair of the damaged tyre Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Vol
126. too hard blow more gently Display text Alcoguard Blow harder Alcoguard wait Preheating Meaning Action Blowing too weak blow harder Heating not finished wait for text Alco guard Blow 5 sec onds 03 Your driving environment G045198 Ignition switch with remote control key extracted inserted and START STOP ENGINE button Do not press in the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 48 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started see page 109 2 Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed For cars with automatic gearbox Depress the brake pedal 3 Press the START STOP ENGINE button and then release it The starter motor works until the engine starts or until its overheating protection triggers If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch after starting the engine or when the car is being towed NARNINC Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car and make sure that the key position is O in par ticular if there are children
127. tyre s DOT marking Department of Transportation and this is stated with four digits for example 1510 The tyre in the illustration was manufac tured in week 15 of 2010 Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on for example L for left and R for right Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear see page 317 Driving style tyre pres sure climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear To avoid dif ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other A suitable dis tance for the first change is approx 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth If significant differences in wear 1 mm difference in tread depth between tyres have already occurred the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer and leads to the car continuing for wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side resulting in pos sible complete loss of control over the car This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up and not standing
128. up A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI Tread Wear Indicator When the tyre s tread depth is down to 1 6 mm the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators Change to new tyres as soon as possible Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow Rims and wheel bolts The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso ries Check the torque with a torque wrench Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu minium and steel rims Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts Located under the cargo area floor are the car s towing eye jack and wheel wrench There is also space for the sleeve for the lock able wheel bolts Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 08 311 08 Wheels and tyres Jack The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel The jack s thread must always be well greased Tools returning into place o e e o A eo The tools and jack must be re
129. video files is connected to the USB port and then it plays back these files How ever the system does not change setting if a 2 Only applies to USB and iPod device containing a mixture of audio and video files is connected to the USB port but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type Fast forward reverse See page 253 Scan See page 254 Random See page 254 Search function The keypad on the control panel in the centre console can be used to find a filename in the current folder The search function is accessed either by turn ing TUNE to access the folder structure or by pressing one of the letter keys As a letter or character in a search string is entered you get closer to your search target Start playback of a file by pressing OK MENU 3 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 4 f Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place 5 Only applies to USB 6 Does not apply to iPod Repeat folder See page 254 Pause When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed the media player is paused When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again the media player starts It is also possi ble to pause via the menu system press OK MENU select Play Pause Audio sources USB memory To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick only store music files on it It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that con
130. with the tailgate open 285 WI tale esencias 298 Driving in Water 284 Driving with a trailer towball Ion 373 towing Capacitan 373 DSTC see also Stability control system 147 pr A 252 ECC electronic climate control 213 Economical OrIVING s rta eei 284 EGO Pressure vusriarancd acia 917 Eco Start Stop DRIVe 127 Electrical SOGKQU ce iret nn 229 CAPOTE Mere RE 293 ON SOAT sci nenna 229 Electric parking brake s 137 low battery voltage 137 releasing automatically 138 releasing manually 138 Emergency equipment warning triangle 318 Emergency puncture repair 321 Emissions of carbon dioxide 291 Engine OVerTieatilig conc code 298 aTa S PE A es nn T 113 Engine block heater 118 TUG OIA y 5 220 Engine compartment COO ue 332 OS AETA 329 au 329 power steering fluid 334 Engine drag control 146 Engine Oil 329 378 adverse driving conditions 378 CAPACES vrs EMEN 378 SR 329 OM ACS oe dones aa 3 8 Engine specifications 376 Environmental labelling FSC owner s Error messages Adap
131. 0 Green continuous light the car is locked e Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm 02 47 02 Locks and alarm 02 48 Remote control key key blade EU If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last commu nication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out The key blade s unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops which are rec ommended when ordering new key blades Key blade functions Using the remote control key s detachable key blade e the left hand front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be acti vated with the remote control key see page 54 e therear doors mechanical child safety locks can be activated deactivated see page 62 e the right hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually e g in the event of power failure see page 57 e access to the glovebox and cargo area privacy locking can be blocked see page 49 e the airbag for front passenger seat PACOS can be activated deactivated see page 22 Removing the key blade
132. 040904 Lower the battery into the battery box 2 Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box Tighten the clamp that holds the battery 4 Connect the ventilation hose gt Check that it is correctly connected to both battery and outlet in the body Connect the red positive cable 6 Connect the black negative cable Press in the rear cover See Removal 1 Absorbed Glass Mat 8 Fit the rubber moulding See Removal 9 Align the front cover and secure it with the clips See removal For more information on the car s main battery see page 391 Eco Start Stop DRIVe Cars with the Start Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries one extra powerful battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Eco Start Stop DRIVe function s starting sequence For more information on Start Stop see page 127 For more information on the car s main battery see page 120 and 391 09 Maintenance and service Q 09 Cold start capacity 760 180 CCA A SizeB LxWxH A ooo 0 190 mm Capacity Ah 70 10 A In accordance with the SAE standard B Largest possible size D IMPORTANT When replacing batteries in cars with the Start Stop function the AGM type batter ies must be fitted wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 347 09 Maintenance and service The higher the current take off in the car
133. 045223 Control panel in centre console Navigation NAV see separate owner s manual Road and Traffic Information Sys tem RTI e Infotainment RADIO MEDIA TEL see page 234 Car settings MY CAR see page 202 o Park assist camera CAM see page 191 Climate control see page 210 Volvo Sensus is the car s operating system the heart of your personal Volvo experience Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func tions in several of the car s systems on the centre console TV screen With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface Settings can be made in Car settings Infotainment Climate etc With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel s right hand keypad functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented such as City Safety Locks and alarm setting the clock etc With a press on the respective function RADIO MEDIA TEL NAV and CAM other sources systems and functions can be acti vated e g AM FM1 CD DVD TV Blue tooth navigation and park assist camera For more information on all functions systems see the respective section in the owner s man ual Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment QD 03 CL OD 03 Your driving
134. 173 174 Collision warning system radar sensor 160 168 173 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 173 Colour code palrit uuoc eintritt 365 Combined instrument panel 71 200 Comfort inside the passenger compart MEN c 227 COMPASS E ah di 106 CAlIDATIOMES Sun 106 Condensation in headlamps 361 controls centre Console dard bnc uenti 235 Controls centre console ss 202 Controls JAMES a 86 CONtOLS DO Busca 72 Cooling SYSTEM siisciietsciasiacasondeessnecataasess 284 Corner Traction Control 146 Crash see Oollision 30 Cruise COMO sees estecs acad bna tii tta eun 152 CZIP Clear Zone Interior Package 211 pi A 249 Deadlock deactValON miriam iici 60 temporary deactivation 61 pozo e AA 60 pj A 217 DIESE PT Tro Re inl 289 Diesel particle filter 290 Dipstick electronic 331 Direction indicators 92 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 124 Display ontiNg 8 86 Distance Warning 165 Dolby Surround Pro Logic ll 234 DOOI TAME OFS oe RR 103 Driveable punctured tyres 320 Driver Alert Control o 182 Driver Alert System 181 pei 284 COCINA SYSTEMS 284
135. 2 Thumbwheel e RESET button 1 Beforestarting the engine Select key posi tion I see page 78 2 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heat auto 3 Press RESET to select between ON and OFF The menu options are only visible in key position any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine 1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned 2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned Passenger compartment heater If the additional heater is supplemented with timer function then it can be used as a fuel driven passenger compartment heater see page 220 Electric additional heater Cars with certain petrol engines have an elec tric additional heater integrated into the car s climate control system In a semi cold climate zone diesel driven cars have an electric additional heater instead of a fuel driven version The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera tures below 14 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached d Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 05 223 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer General IOOO0km to empty tank Information display and controls be OK confirms 2
136. A DERE 384 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pres Ue rn E JO a 388 I CINEARS ste HE lt lt 0 391 I ssoval Bl BEENBL SS 392 Symbols in the display 404 Introduction Important information Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner s manual ideally before your first journey This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions to see how best to handle the car in different sit uations and to make the best use of all the car s features Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual The specifications design features and illus trations in this owner s manual are not binding We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice Volvo Car Corporation Option All types of option accessory are marked with an asterisk In addition to standard equipment this manual also describes options factory fitted equip ment and certain accessories retrofitted extra equipment The equipment described in the owner s man ual is not available in all cars they have dif ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations In the event of uncertainty over what is stand ard or an option accessory contact a Volvo dealer Special texts Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury
137. ANT Cleaning the sensors NOTE Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals When fitting auxiliary lamps Remember that they must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa 04 tion display shows Park assist syst Service required then parking assistance is disen gaged D IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre quencies that the system works with G044103 Examples of such sources include horns wet tyres on asphalt pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc G044102 Sensor location rear The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly Clean them with water and car shampoo 190 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Park assist camera General The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged can be changed in the settings menu see page 202 The camera image is shown on the centre con sole s screen When a towbar is configured with the car s electrical system the protrusion of the tow bar is included when the function measures the parking space e The parking camera serves as a
138. Cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front The function is active at speeds above 70 km h WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during over taking e g when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road the car will then accelerate briefly Deactivate Keypad with Speed limiter Adaptive cruise control is deactivated with the steering wheel button P The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the 2 button Keypad without Speed limiter With a short press on the steering wheel button P the cruise control is set in standby mode 04 Driver support With a further short press the cruise control is deactivated The set speed is cleared and can not be resumed with the O button Queue Assistant In cars with automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assis tant function also referred to as Queue Assist Queue Assistant has the following functions e Extended speed range also below 30 km h and at standstill e Change of target e Automatic braking ceases when stationary e Automatic activation parking brake Note that the lowest programmable speed for the cruise control is 30 km h even though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill a lower speed cannot be selected Extended speed r
139. D5 D5244T15 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 D5AWD D5244T15 Automatic TF 80SC 1800 90 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 370 B DRIVe for certain markets C Only certain markets D Without Start Stop E With Start Stop Max weight unbraked trailer kg Max towball load kg 50 375 0110 OO 17 10 Specifications Engine specifications Engine specifications Y OLA Not all engines are available in all markets Engine Torque Nm Swept Com code rpm volume pression litres ratio TES B4164T3 110 5700 150 5700 240 1600 4000 4 79 81 4 1 596 10 0 1 me B4164T 132 5700 180 5700 240 1600 5000 4 79 81 4 1 596 10 0 1 T4C B5204T8 132 5000 180 5000 300 2700 4200 5 81 0 v 1 984 10521 T4F B4164T2 132 5700 180 5700 240 1600 5000 4 79 81 4 1 596 1004 To B4204T7 177 5500 240 5500 320 1800 5000 4 87 5 83 1 1 999 10 0 1 T5 B5204T9 157 6000 213 6000 300 2700 5000 5 81 0 ya 1 984 10 5 1 IS B5254T12 187 5400 254 5400 360 1800 4200 5 83 0 92 3 2 497 951 T6 B6304T4 224 5600 304 5600 440 2100 4200 6 82 0 93 2 2 953 9 3 1 D2 D4162T 84 3600 115 3600 270 1750 2500 4 15 88 3 1 560 16 0 1 D3 D5204T7 100 3500 136 3500 350 1500 2250 5 81 0 uy 1 984 1651 D4 D5204T3 120 3500 163 3500 400 1500 2750 5 81 0 UT 1 984 16 51 D4 AWD D5244T17 120 4000 163 4000 420 1500 2500 5 81 0 93 2 2 400 16 51 01 10 0X0 11 10 Specifications Engine specifications Engine Output Torque Nm
140. DES 49 Battery replacement remote control key PCC Gi A ER RR cmo ee PELLE DTI TED 53 COMO UM mr eels 57 Childisafety OEI arm rn ee me A 62 AA Rae er err a N 63 42 Option accessory for more information see Introduction LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm 02 E Remote control key key blade General The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs Personal Car Communicator They are used to start the car and for locking and unlocking Additional remote control keys can be ordered up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car The remote control key contains a removable key blade made of metal The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys The PCC has increased functionality com pared with the remote control key The contin uation of this chapter describes the functions available in both the PCC and the remote con trol key WARNING If there are children in the car Hemember to switch off the supply to the power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car 1 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors 2 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The remain ing remote
141. Diesel see page 289 01 10 00 11 10 Specifications Fluids and lubricants Under normal driving conditions the gear box oil does not need to be changed during its service life However this may be nec essary under adverse driving conditions see page 381 10 Specifications CO emissions and fuel consumption 10 S use aut T4FB aut la man de T6 AWD aut Pe man 384 230 202 230 219 212 238 223 261 269 346 187 9 9 8 7 9 9 9 5 12 90 10 2 13 60 187 125 137 129 1249 135 1350 143 148 175 109 5 9 5 4 5 9 5 6 7 59 5 8 8 29 6 1 6 3 7 5 4 1 Lea a eta ARS 174 F5 119 5 1 139 A 153 171 162 1569 173 1679 186 192 237 ALIAS LJ of x 6 0 7 4 6 6 7 4 7 0 9 5 7 5 10 2 8 0 8 2 10 2 4 5 10 Specifications ES D3 138 52 108 4 1 119 4 5 D3 aut 187 7 1 127 4 8 149 5 7 D4 138 5 2 108 4 1 119 4 5 D4D 214 8 1 12 4 8 159 6 0 D4E aut 187 Ti 127 4 8 149 5 7 D4 AWD 226 8 6 137 5 2 169 6 4 D5 148 5 6 104 4 0 120 4 6 man db 385 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications 10 y La Dee mem D5 221 8 5 128 4 9 162 6 2 D5 AWD 226 8 6 137 32 169 6 4 A DRIVe for certain markets B Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85 Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels e is poss
142. ED Slide the spring loaded catch to the side E gt At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot 2 Lightly press the key blade You should hear a click when the key blade is locked in Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key e g if the batteries are discharged then the left hand front door can be opened as follows 1 Unlockthe left hand front door with the key blade in the door handle s lock cylinder See also the illustration and further infor mation see page 54 When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered 2 Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch For a car with the Keyless system see page 54 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking General information on privacy locking locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected Activate deactivate from the central locking the tailgate cannot be dus opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control key This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activat
143. EE APENAS Cr SH E Bk SE FERRER SERT PEREZ FE e CCAB10LP0230T7 10 Specifications 01 10 0X0 11 Type approval CAI South MS uu 10 SEE Volvo Car Korea Ala XF BE N25 IAM2101V M3 Y Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio DE Y AM2 1 t EME March 2010 Alpine Electronics Inc Made in Japan 17H AH Volvo Car Korea etg Asa uelot AZN EN etd 235 726 173 27844 eg AMA SIE 1588 1777 Of http www volvocars com kr MEA FS Ae X Sol SAAS Aled 2540 VOSS BOA rele MUA SSuct gt gt 10 Specifications Type approva approval CA 10 Singa pore Complies with IDA Standards DA100925 X The Uni ted Arab Emirates T RA REGISTERED No 0020557 09 DEALER No 0014517 08 Jordan The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number BT module certification number TRC LPD 2010 4 BT module name IAM2 1BT PWB EU 01 10 00 17 10 Specifications Type approval counts O OOO 10 South Africa ae q 74 2010 187 IC A S A Uruguay This product contains URSEC approved transmitter module name and model name IAM2 1 BT PWB EU BVJG905A BVVE905A BVLV905A VERUM ike E dd douce A Modan Fi mii aT CE UE Po Co DR SE DLL SEE mm x dw cms uu NUN HELF TES E Gne queo cxi M ge hee QA sun eee eee mess Ps Pd D B Bd bb mode Rem GE pod EUR Ri mu o ee E GE 7 ne Eu ec las G044570
144. ENU 2 Turn TUNE to select a frequency The preset from the factory is that the radio automatically searches for the stations in the area where you are driving see previous section Station list above But if you have changed over to manual tun ing by pressing the ufo button in the cen tre console when the station list was shown then the radio remains set in the function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio To change back to the function for Station list turn TUNE one step to show the complete list of stations and press the button INFO Note that if you press neo when the sta tion list is not shown then INFO is activated For more information on this function see page 235 Preset 10 presets can be stored per wavelength AM FM1 etc The stored presets are selected using the pre set buttons 1 Tune into a station see Tuning page 245 2 Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few seconds the sound disappears during this time and returns when the station is stored The preset button can now be used A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in FM AM mode under FM menu gt Show presets or AM menu Show presets RDS functions RDS Radio Data System links FM transmitters into a network An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions e Automati
145. Engine gearbox and cooling system Under special conditions for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load For information about overheating when driv ing with a trailer see page 298 e Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates e fthe temperature in the engine s cooling system is too high the instrument panel s warning symbol is illuminated and there is a text message displayed there High engine temp Stop safely stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to cool down e fthe text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car e Inthe event of overheating in the gearbox a built in protection function is activated which amongst other things illuminates the instrument panel s warning symbol and there is a text message displayed there Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool down e If the car overheats the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily e Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive It is no
146. MS Tyre Pressure Monitoring System warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car s tyres It uses Sensors located inside the air valve in each wheel When the car is driven at about 40 km h the system detects the tyre pressure If the pres sure is too low then a warning lamp C on the instrument panel illuminates and a message is shown on the display Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then Tyre press syst Service required will be shown every time the car is driven faster than 40 km h for more than 10 minutes Always check the system after changing a wheel in order to ensure that replacement wheels work with the system For information on correct tyre pressures see page 388 The system does not replace normal tyre main tenance D IMPORTANT If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instru ment panel will illuminate and a message will be shown This can be for various rea sons e g fitting a wheel not equipped with a sensor adapted for Volvo s tyre pressure monitoring system Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in order to follow Volvo s tyre pressure recom mendations when driving with a heavy load for example NOTE The engine must not be running when the tyres are calibrated The settings are made with the control in the
147. Media player Changing chapter or title Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate through them if the film is being played back then it is paused Press OK MENU to select the chapter this also leads back to the original position if the film was being played back then it is restarted Press EXIT to access the title list Titles are selected in the title list by turning TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK MENU this also leads back to the chapter list Press OK MENU to activate the selection and return to the start position Use EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads back to the original position without any selection being made The chapter can also be changed by pressing on rr SI on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Advanced settings Angle If the DVD video disc supports it the function can be used to choose from which camera position a particular scene should be shown Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings Angle DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or USB The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings gt Information DivX VOD code For general information on menus see under MY CAR see page 202 For more information visit www divx com vod Picture settings You can adjust the settings when the car is stationary for brightness and contrast
148. OFIX child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limited or semi universal categories IUF Suitable for front facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class A Volvo recommends rear facing child seats for this group a 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 L i E l Upper mounting points for child seats co a 9 e Y a jo The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front facing child seats These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front facing child seats Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear facing child seats to as late an age as possible Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points see the seat manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING The child seat s straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attach ment point M Remote control key key blade 11 cec eene crecen 44 m miu ko S boot RETO
149. Option accessory for more information see Introduction Boundary lines G043903 The system s lines Gp Boundary line 30 cm zone backwards from the car e Boundary line free reversing zone Wheel tracks The unbroken line 1 frames in a zone that is within about 30 cm from the bumper The dashed line 2 frames in a zone up to about 1 5 m back from the bumper It is also the limit of the car s most protruding parts such as door mirrors and corners also during turning The wide wheel tracks 3 between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3 2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way Cars with reversing sensors Coloured areas x 4 one per sensor show dis tance If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors see page 188 the distance indi cation will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is are reg istering an obstacle The colour of the areas changes with decreas ing distance to the obstacle from yellow to orange to red Colour paint Distance metres Yellow 1 5 Orange 0 3 1 5 Red 0 0 3 Settings Press OK MENU when a camera view is shown Make the settings as desired Miscellaneous e The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged e One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged e Change between normal and zoomed i
150. PCC Personal Car Communicator E Information Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated Press and hold at least 2 seconds to close all the windows and sunroof simultaneously WARNING If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail gate while the alarm is deactivated Press and hold at least 4 seconds to open all windows simultaneously The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously to unlocking the driv er s door only with one press of the button and after a further press of the button within 10 seconds unlocking the remaining doors The function can be changed in the menu sys tem MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Driver door then all For a description of the menu system see page 202 Approach light duration Used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance For more information see page 94 s Tailgate Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only For more information see page 60 Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti vate the direction indicators and the horn The function can be turned off with the s
151. Park heat 2 Press RESET to select between ON and OFF ON Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer OFF Parking heater switched off Following the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature ea The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running Setting the timer The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2 The timer can only be programmed when the remote control key is in key position I see page 78 programming must therefore be carried out before starting the engine 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat timer 1 2 Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing hours setting 3 Select the required hour using the thumb wheel 4 Briefly press RESET to move to the flash ing minutes setting 5 Select the required minute using the thumbwheel 6 Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting 7 Press RESET to activate the timer After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start time can be programmed with Park heat timer 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1 Deactivating a timer started heater A timer started
152. Phone gt call number or Phone call number System reply Number User action Start saying the numbers as individual units i e six eight seven etc in the phone number If you say several numbers and pause the sys tem will repeat them and then say Continue Continue to say the numbers When finished finish the command by saying Call e You can also change the number by saying the commands Correct which deletes x Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 gt gt 273 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone 06 274 the last spoken group of numbers or Delete which deletes the whole spoken phone number Dialling from the call register The following dialogue allows you to make a phone call from one of your mobile phone s call registers The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone call from the call register or Phone call from the call register Continue by responding to the system s prompts Call a contact The following dialogue allows you to call your pre defined contacts in the mobile phone The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone call contact Or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system s prompts Consider the following when you call a contact e lf there are several contacts with similar names they will be presented in the dis play in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select
153. RS unavailable because someone was in the passen ger compartment ERS unavailable due to warning message from engine Con tact a workshop ERS unavailable because gear selec tor was not in P posi tion ERS unavailable due to error message from cooling sys tem see page 332 No remote start low fuel level No remote start Max 2 starts ERS unavailable because fuel level too low ERS unavailable because a maximum of 2 ERS activations in succession are allowed A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Interrupted ERS function Remote start off low battery Remote start off low fuel level Remote start off engine warning ERS interrupted because battery voltage too low ERS interrupted because fuel level too low ERS interrupted due to error message from engine Con tact a workshop Starting the engine Remote start off ERS interrupted gear not in P because gear selec tor is not in P posi tion Remote start off ERS interrupted driver in car because someone is in the passenger compartment A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 03 Your driving environment CD 03 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Starting the engine Flexifuel General information about starting with Flexifuel The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol engined car In the event of starting difficulties If the engine does not start at the first start atte
154. SB unit is taking too much power this may happen if the unit connected does not meet the USB standard The USB connection is reactiva ted automatically the next time the ignition is turned on unless the fault persists Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction External audio source via AUX USB input Playback and navigation Turn TUNE to access the playlist folder struc ture and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play list or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Audio video files can also be changed by pressing e FP on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol 4 4 video files have the symbol BS and folders have the symbol WE When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a device containing only audio files or only
155. a row number e If there are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously saying Down allows you to scroll down in the list and saying Up allows you to scroll up in the list Calling voice mailbox The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function see page 265 The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone call voice mailbox Or Phone call voice mailbox Continue by responding to the system s prompts i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system cut menu is shown with commonly used General IMPORTANT This system only supports TV transmissions in countries which transmit signals in mpeg 2 format and follow the DVB T stand ard The system does not support TV trans missions in mpeg 4 format or analogue transmissions The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed over about 6 km h the picture disap pears No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture reappears when the car has stopped Cars with RSE do not shut off the rear screens The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such a
156. accessory for more information see Introduction gear is engaged without M declutching a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting The driver is unrestrained the A gear selector is in P position and the driver s door is open a nor mal engine start must take place The gear selector is moved to P A position press the START STOP ENGINE button to restart the engine If the driver s door is opened before starting the engine with the START STOP ENGINE but ton the Start Stop function is switched off A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox Involuntary engine stop with manual gearbox In the event that a start up fails and the engine stops proceed as follows 03 Your driving environment DRIVe Start Stop 1 Depress the clutch pedal again the engine The MY CAR menu system in the car includes starts automatically instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe 2 n certain cases the gear lever must be set Concept along with several possible settings in neutral position The information display X and options see page 203 then shows the text Put gear in neutral Text message In combination with this indicator 03 lamp the Start Stop function may dis play text messages on the information display for certain situations For some of them there is a recommended action that should be per formed The following table sh
157. activated in the menu system e Warnings may not appear if the dis tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large e g a very active driving style Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and the system therefore pro vides effective warnings and brake inter ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km h For stationary or slow moving vehicles warnings and brake interventions are effec tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km h Warnings for stationary or slow moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark ness or poor visibility Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km h The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations see page 178 If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced This then leads to the system provid ing a warning at a later stage which reduces the total number of warnings see the section Set warning distance on page 176 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 177
158. ad Burned discs audio video files Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist folder structure and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to confirm either selection of sub folder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level 3 Does not apply to CD Audio Audio video files can also be changed by pressing ea fA gt gt on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol 4 4 video files have the symbol BS and folders have the symbol WE When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a disc containing only audio files or only video files is loaded into the media player and then plays back these files How ever the system does not change setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio and video files is loaded into the media player but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 4 f Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place A video film is only shown when the car is stationary Wh
159. affected accordingly Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle you cannot use snow chains at the same time On all wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected The spare wheel must not be repaired The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table see page 388 D IMPORTANT Never drive faster than 80 km h with a spare wheel on the car D IMPORTANT The car must never be driven fitted with more than one temporary spare wheel The spare wheel is supplied in a bag which must be placed on the cargo area floor in the cargo area and be secured with straps Cars with two load retaining eyelets Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag in towards the rear seat Attach the sewn in ten sioning strap hooks in the load retaining eye lets Attach the long strap into one of the load retaining eyelets run the strap around the spare wheel and through the lower handle Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the long one Attach the second load retaining eyelet and tighten i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Cars with four load retaining eyelets Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out towards you Attach the sewn in tensioning strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets Attach the long strap into one of the front load retaining eyelets run the strap diagonally
160. aints to improve rearward visi bility WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard E Option accessory for more information see Introduction G021138 Adjusting the steering wheel Lever releasing the steering wheel Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth 1 Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you 3 Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place If the lever is stiff press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back ANN TE Horn Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted see page 226 j G043465 Horn Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal Keypads in the steering wheel Cruise control see page 152 Adaptive cruise control see page 154 i 2 Audio and phone control see page 235 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment OD Steering wheel 03 85 OD 03 Your driving environment Lighting Headlamp control Headlamp control with AUTO mode The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel H
161. al information on infotainment of the car The compensation level can be set to low medium high or off Select the level under Audio settings gt Volume compensation For general information on menu navigation see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 External audio source audio volume If an external audio source e g an MP3 player or iPod9 is connected to the AUX input then the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system s inter nal volume e g radio Correct this by adjust ing the volume of the input 1 Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK MENU 2 Press OK MENU and then turn TUNE to AUX input volume Confirm with OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input If the external audio source s volume is too high or too low the quality of the sound may deteriorate The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode In which case avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre calibrated for opti mum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing This calibration takes into account loudspeak ers amplifiers passenger compartment acoustics listener position etc for each com bination of car model and audio system There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the p
162. alarm Remote control key key blade Lock indicator Insert car key Car key not found PE G043763 Same LED as alarm indicator see page 63 A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked ea Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator Immobiliser Try Immobiliser start again Each remote control key has a unique code The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code The following error messages in the combined instrument panel s information display are rela ted to the electronic immobiliser Error when reading the remote control key during starting Remove the key from the ignition switch press it in again and make a new start attempt Error reading the remote control key during starting Try to start again If the error persists Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again Error in immobiliser system during star ting If the error per sists Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended For starting the car see page 113 Functions 02 o wo e o Remote control key standard version Locking A Unlocking 0 Approach light duration lt 3 Tailgate L Panic function ID o 02 Locks and alarm 02 46 Remote control key key blade co o iD o o Remote control key with
163. alls are accepted automatically Activate deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Auto answer In call menu Press OK MENU during an ongoing call to access the following functions e Mute audio system microphone is muted Mobile phone the call is transferred from handsfree to the mobile phone For some mobile phones the connection is interrup ted This is normal The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect e Dial number option to call a third party using the number keys current call set in standby Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree func tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection In normal view turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register for All calls In phone mode it is possible to see all the call lists under Phone menu All calls All calls Missed calls Answered calls Dialled calls Call duration Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order Voice mailbox In normal view a speed dial number for the voice mailbox can be programmed in and then accessed later via a long press on 1 Voice mailbox number is changed in phone mode under Phone menu Call options gt Voicemail number Change number If Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 265 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree there is no
164. ame button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Range The remote control key s functions have a range of about 20 m from the car If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc The car can always be locked unlocked using the key blade see page 48 If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position l or Il is active see page 78 and if all doors are closed then a warning message is shown in the information display and an audible reminder signal sounds at the same time The warning message clears and the audio reminder signal stops when the remote control key is brought back to the car after e The remote control key has been inserted in the ignition switch e Speed exceeds 30 km h e the OK button has been pressed Remote control key key blade Unique PCC functions G045799 Remote control key with PCC Personal Car Communicator D Information button Indicator lamps Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indica tor lamps Using the information button Press the information button FA gt Al indicat
165. an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking there will be a collision sooner or later Two system levels Depending on how the car equipped the Col lision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection function may appear in two variants Level 1 and Level 2 Level 1 The driver is merely warned of occurring obsta cles by means of visual and acoustic signals no automatic braking intervenes the driver must himself brake Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals the car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time D IMPORTANT Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model 2 With system Level 2 only Function 04 Function overview Audio visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk Radar sensor Camera sensor Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order 1 Collision warning 2 Brake support 3 Auto Brake vi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 173 ty 04 Driver support 04 174 Collision Warning with Au
166. and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC Replacing the battery The batteries should be replaced if Battery replacement Closely study how the battery batteries are secured on the inside of the cover with e the information symbol is illuminated and regard to their and sides the display shows Low battery in remote control Please change batteries Remove control key 1 battery and or 1 Carefully prize out the battery 2 Install a new one with the side down PCC 2 batteries e thelocks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within G015518 20 metres from the car O i 1 Carefully prize out the batteries pening 2 First install one new one with the side Es D gt Slide the spring loaded catch to the up Slot 3 Position the white plastic tab in between 23 At the same time pull the key blade and finally install a second new battery with straight out backwards the side down Iz E gt Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the Battery type hole behind the spring loaded catch and Use batteries with the designation CR2430 3V 3 gently prize the remote control key up one in the remote control key and two in the PCC Assembly Turn the remote control key over with the 1 Press the remote control key together buttons facing up this is to avoid the bat teries falling out when it is opened 2 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up
167. and sudden braking the driver must brake himself herself This applies with large differ ences in speed or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily Due to limitations in the radar sensor braking may come unexpectedly or not at all see page 160 The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km h up to 200 km h If the speed falls below 30 km h or if the engine speed becomes too low the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases the driver must then take over himself herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead Warning lamp braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 4096 of the car s braking capacity 2 Queue Assistant in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range of 0 200 km h see page 159 If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake then the cruise control uses the collision warning system s warning lamp and warning sound see page 173 to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required The warning lamp may be difficult to notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn Cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor Consequently there may be no warning or it may be sub ject to a delay Do not wait for a warning but brake when it is necessary Steep road
168. ange In order to activate the cruise control the driver s door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt With automatic gearbox the cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range of 0 200 km h Activation of the cruise control below 30 km h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto matically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking The driver must then re activate the cruise control in one of the following ways e Press the steering wheel button Ol or e Depress the accelerator pedal gt The cruise control will then resume follow ing the vehicle in front Adaptive cruise control Queue Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes then the parking brake is applied and Cruise Control is dis engaged e The driver has to release the parking brake before the cruise control can be reactivated Change of target G044031 If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will slow down for the statio
169. aning Set the wiper blades in service position see page 341 Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo Do not use any strong solvents Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car but it cannot reach everywhere Handwashing the car is recom mended for achieving optimum results During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed This is because the paintwork is more sensitive when it is new High pressure washing When using high pressure washing use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car the distance applies to all exterior parts Do not spray directly onto the locks 09 Maintenance and service 09 Car care Testing the brakes Always test the brakes after washing the car including the parking brake to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per formance Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush The heat from the friction causes the brake lin ings to warm up and dry Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather Exterior plastic rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts rubber and trim component
170. ansmitter and receiver window City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen If there is an imminent risk of collision City Safety will automatically brake the car which may be experienced as sudden braking If the speed difference is 4 15 km h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision City Safety activates a short sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances just behind the vehicle in front For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfortable City Safety If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own To obtain full brake force the driver must depress the brake pedal This could then make it possible to prevent a collision even at speed differen ces above 15 km h When the function is activated and brakes the instrument panel display shows a message to the effect that the function is has been active enm The brake lights come on when City Safety brakes the car Operation The City Safety M function is always ena bled after the engine has been started via key position I and Il see page 78 on key positions On and Off In certain situations it may advisable to disable City Safety e g where leafy branches could
171. assenger seat but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion EJ The airbag is deactivated With the switch in this position children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat but never persons taller than 140 cm n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 Safety 9 Activating deactivating the airbag 01 WARNING Activated airbag passenger seat Activated airbag Deactivated airbag Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm Deactivated airbag passenger seat No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated PASSENGER ix AIRBAG OFF 2 G017800 G017724 Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated deactivated A warning symbol in the roof console indicates A text message and a symbol in the roof con When the remote control key is in key posi that the airbag for the front passenger seat is sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas tion Il the warning symbol for the airbag is activated see preceding illustration senger seat is deactivated see preceding illus displayed on the combined instrument tration panel for ap
172. astened and secured when being refitted Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses at the cargo area s rear posts 07 During your journey Cargo area D IMPORTANT The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted Attaching the cargo cover il Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel p Move the other end piece into the corres ponding recess KD Press both sides in A click should be audible and the red marking should disap pear gt Check that both end pieces are locked Removing the cargo cover 1 Press in one end piece button and lift it out 2 Carefully angle the cover up out and the other end piece loosens automatically Lowering the cargo cover s rear sealing disc In its rolled in position the cargo cover s rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted Pullthe sealing disc back gently free from its support shelves and lower 07 07 During your journey 07 298 Driving with a trailer General Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories e g towbar reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed information on weights see page 373 If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo then the car is delivered with the necessary equip ment for driving with a trailer e The car s
173. ating position For the best possible protection the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint Do not obstruct the WHIPS system Do not leave any objects on the floor behind th driver s seat passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back rest Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system S 01 Safety AA WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces such as due to a rear end collision the WHIPS system must be checked Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop Part of the WHIPS system s protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys re m tem checked even after a minor rear end Do not place objects on the rear seat that may collision prevent the WHIPS system from functioning WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest 01 Safety 9 When the systems deploy 01 When the systems deploy Seatbelt tensioner front seat Seatbelt tensioner rear seat Airbags SRS Side airbags SIPS Inflatable Curtain IC Wh
174. ation 33ns Wavelength 905nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated July 26 2001 The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam s classification e Laser radiation Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam s physical data e EC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA U S Food Administration stand ards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with Laser Notice No 50 from 26 July 2001 Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sensor s physical data Maximum pulse energy 2 64 uJ Maximum average output 45 mW Pulse duration 33 ns Divergence horizontal x verti 28 x 127 cal Never look into the laser sensor which emits spreading invisible laser radiation at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass microscope lens or similar opti cal instruments Testing repair removal adjustment and or replacement of the laser sen sor s spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop we rec ommend an authorised Volvo work shop To avoid exposure to harmful radiation do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here The repairer must follo
175. ause severe damage and injury and risk lives Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen Search with the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Driver support systems gt Collision Warning see page 202 Maintenance Camera and radar sensor For the sensors to work correctly they must be kept clear of dirt ice and snow and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement Limitations Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes trian Detection is active from approx 4 km h The visual warning signal no 1 in the illustra tion on page 173 may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight reflections when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead The warning sound should therefore always be activated On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is de
176. be removed this is also done with the key blade 1 Press the key blade approx 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle cover do not prize The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the open ing 2 Then insert the key blade in the lock cylin der and unlock the door 3 Refit the plastic cover after unlocking When the driver s door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is trig gered It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch see page 64 Key memory driver s seat and door mirrors PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the car then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver s door After the driver s door has been opened by person A with PCC A but person B with PCC B shall drive the settings can be changed in three ways e Standing by the driver s door or sitting behind the steering wheel person B 2 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors presses their PCC s unlock button see page 45 e Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1 3 see page 81 e Adjust seat and mirrors manually see page 81 and 103 Lock settings The Keyless function can be adapted by indi cating in the menu system MY CAR which doors shall be unlocked und
177. ber recurs in the position list featured in con nection with the illustration that describes the item Introduction Important information Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner s manual Example e Coolant e Engine oil To be continued gt gt This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page Recording data Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle s operation and function ality Some of the computers can record infor mation during normal driving if they detect an error In addition information is recorded in the event of a collision or incident Parts of the recorded information are required so that tech nicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations In addition to this the infor mation is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and injuries The information includes details of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine throttle steering and brake systems amongst other things This information may include details regarding the way the driver
178. brake force in order to reduce collision speed or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision i Option accessory for more information see Introduction The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic weather or road conditions The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to animals Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision This section Function and the section Limitations inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km h Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians do not work in darkness and tunnels not even when streetlights are lit The auto brake function can prevent a col lision or reduce collision speed To ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal even when the car auto brakes Never wait for a collision warning The driver is always responsible that the correct dis tance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system with auto brake is used Detection of pedestrians G043978 Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours Optimal performance of the system requires that the system fu
179. by mode where a low number of bars indicates incon sistent driving style Many bars indicates stable An alarm should be taken very seriously as e Search on the centre console s display driving a sleepy driver is often not aware of his her screen with its MY CAR menu system and own condition locate Car settings gt Driver support If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired systems Driver Alert and tick the box irs E alerted by en a pa well as ness stop the car in a safe manner as soon e text message Driver Alert time Tor a as possible and rest e No tick in the box Function disengaged n a gag break The warning Is repeated after a time if Studies have shown that it is equally as dan Function driving ability does not improve gerous to drive while tired as it is under the Driver Alert is activated when speed influence of alcohol exceeds 65 km h and remains active 04 as long as the speed is over 60 km h Symbols and messages in the display Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged Driver Alert Standby 65 The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km h km h Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Head about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 Ld Driver Alert The function analyses the driver s driving style The number of bars ca
180. by pulling 8 Safety cable Push in the locking wheel ED and turn it it up down and back anticlockwise B until you hear a click WARNING WARNING l Be sure to attach the trailer s safety cable to If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it the correct place must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions D IMPORTANT RU m UNE F li m L D s e a i d co o Y LI e o o Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry Turn the locking wheel down fully until it comes to a stop Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward WARNING EN Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the unlocked position car see page 300 07 o Y ps A o o a Push the protective cover until it snaps tight Trailer Stability Assist TSA The TSA system Trailer Stability Assist serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake The TSA function is part of the DSTC system Dynamic Stability and Traction Control see page 146 Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car trailer combination Normally snaking occurs at extremely high speeds But there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds 70 90 km h if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed e g too far back In or
181. c disconnection takes place if the external device moves out of the infotainment system s range For more information on con nection see page 260 Remove the connected device 1 Press Bluetooth mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth device and confirm with OK MENU e Option accessory for more information see Introduction 3 Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU gt A prompt asking whether or not you want to remove the connection is shown in the TV screen 4 Press OK MENU to confirm EXIT cancels Random This function plays back the audio files on the external device in random order Activate deactivate the random function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Random Change audio file by pressing ERI ES on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Scanning of audio files in external device This function play backs the first ten seconds of each audio file Activate deactivate the func tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu gt Scan Cancel scanning with EXIT 06 Infotainment system Media Bluetooth Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth software version in car 06 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 261 9 06 Infotainment system 06 262 Bluetooth handsfree General A mobile
182. cally switches to a stronger trans mitter if reception in the area is poor e Searches for programme type such as traffic information or news e Receives text information on current radio programme NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use For example if the CD player is in use it is paused The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume see page 249 The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set pro gramme type is no longer broadcast The programme functions alarm ALARM traffic information TP news NEWS and pro gramme types PTY interrupt one another in order of priority where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest For additional settings of programming inter ruptions EON Distant and EON Local see the section Enhanced Other Networks EON below Press EXIT to return to the inter rupted audio source press the OK MENU to clear the message Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci dents and catastrophes The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated The message ALARM appears on the TV screen when an alarm message is transmitted Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The
183. camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Head about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 The system is disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 started Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained e Increased sensitivity The sensitivity increases an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 187 ay 04 Driver support 04 188 Park assist syst Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console s display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console s VOL knob or in the car s menu system MY CAR see page 202 Parking assistance is available in two variants e Rear only e Both front and rear When a towbar is configured with the car s electrical system the protrusion of the tow bar is included when the function measures the parking space e Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver s own responsibility during parking e The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of e g peo
184. can be adjusted The audio system can be used for a limited time see page 234 Sunroof power windows 12 V socket in the passenger compartment RTI phone ventilation fan and wind screen wipers can be used The headlamps come on Warning indicator lamps illu minate for 5 seconds Several other systems are activated However heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine has been started This key position consumes a lot of current from the starter battery and should therefore be avoided Choosing key position level Key position O e Unlock the car this means that the car s electrical system is at level O Key position e With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Briefly press START STOP ENGINE To reach level I or Il without starting the engine do not depress the brake clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected Key position Il e With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Give along press on START STOP ENGINE Back to key position 0 e To return to key position 0 from position II and I Briefly press on START STOP ENGINE Audio system For information on the audio system s func tions with remote control key removed see page 234 1 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless function 2 Approx 2 seconds Starting and stopping the engine For information about star
185. case pay extra attention and manoeuvre reposition the car particu larly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are unable to function optimally Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance LULU ENS D G043755 E Tee The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered in front of the car is about about 1 5 metres The acoustic signal for 0 8 metres The acoustic signal for obstacles in obstacles behind comes from one of the rear front comes from one of the front loudspeak loudspeakers ers Rear parking assistance is activated when Front parking assistance is active up to reverse gear is engaged 15 km h The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated When the speed is below 10 km h the system is reactivated The system must be deactivated when revers ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar or similar otherwise they would trigger the sensors Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gear box Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used n T Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 189 ay 04 Driver support Park assist syst D IMPORT
186. cator stalk as 04 Driver support City Safety Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily non operational because something is blocking it blocked e Remove the object blocking the sensor and or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor 04 Read about the limitations of the laser sensor see page 169 City Safety Service City Safety is not operational required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 Driver support y Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection General Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedes trian or vehicle in front that is stationary or moving in the same direction Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter vention Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection must not be used as
187. ce G044748 Vis n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Main fuse for central electronic 175 module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox central electrical unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the glovebox central electrical unit in cargo area PTC element air preheater 100 gt gt 359 09 Maintenance and service 2 Primary fuse for the central elec 50 D Support battery tronic module CEM with fuse box B under the glovebox Central electronic module 15 CEM reference voltage sup Primary fuse for central electri 60 port battery Charging point cal unit in passenger compart support battery ment with fuse box A under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri 60 cal unit in passenger compart ment with fuse box A under the glovebox Primary fuse for central electri 60 cal unit in cargo area 9 Ventilation fan 40 Z 8 2 Start relay 30 Internal diode 50 Washing the car Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator Use car shampoo e Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible Bird droppings con tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration e Hose down the underbody e Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has been removed in
188. ce of masking tape over the damaged surface Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint If the damage has reached down to a metal surface sheet steel it is preferable to use a primer In the event of damage to a plas tic surface an adhesive primer should be used for better results spray into the spray can s cap and brush thinly 09 Maintenance and service 09 gt gt 365 09 Maintenance and service 09 Car care 2 Alight sanding with very fine abrasive material can be performed locally before painting if necessary e g if there are rough edges Clean the surface thoroughly and allow to dry 3 Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush matchstick or similar Finish with base coat and clear coat once the primer has dried 4 For scratches proceed as above but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned 09 Maintenance and service N X VDC designations see ee NEN nes da canne e ese ee nc ide Ee a EAEE 370 SiS A ia 372 ENGine Specifications ne nnonacnnennennanniannes 376 EN cc EBERT 378 0 ii i 0 Wei cmo MC xL Ner EET EETEEE TED TT TETTE TTE TD TTE 381 BUMP ovo o ERE 384 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure ees 388
189. certain countries Winter driving Check the following in particular before the cold season e The engine coolant must contain at least 5096 glycol This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C To achieve optimum antifreeze protection different types of gly col must not be mixed e The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation e Engine oil viscosity is important Oils with lower viscosity thinner oils facilitate star ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold For more information on suitable oils see page 379 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving 07 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving D IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather e The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected Cold weather pla ces great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold e Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car 07 reacts Opening closin
190. ch the label for maximum permitted dem Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and speed and affix it to the steering wheel 08 start the car Emergency puncture repair TMK If the compressor is connected to one of the two 12 V sockets in the tunnel console no other current consumer must be connected to the other one Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running 8 Flick the switch to position I Never stand next to the tyre when the com pressor is running If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately The journey should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended When the compressor starts the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds 9 Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes D IMPORTANT Risk of overheating The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes 10 Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge Minimum pressure is 1 8 bar and maximum 3 5 bar Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high WARNING Ifthe pressure is below 1 8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big The journey should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 11 Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket 12 Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
191. collision trips the sensors and the airbag s are inflated and become hot To cushion the impact the airbag deflates when compressed When this occurs smoke escapes into the car This is completely nor mal The entire process including inflation and deflation of the airbag occurs within tenths of a second Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per sonal injury 01 Safety 9 01 19 S 01 Safety 01 The car has an airbag to supplement the pro tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen ger side It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver and passen ger side are used It is therefore possible that only one or none of the airbags may inflate in a colli sion The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed The seatbelts and airbags interact If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the air bag in the event of a collision The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys passengers must
192. control keys must then be taken to the workshop The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR under Information Number of keys For a description of the menu system see page 202 Key memory door mirrors and driver s seat The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key see pages 81 and 103 The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Car key memory For a description of the menu system see page 202 For cars with the Keyless drive system see page 53 Indicator for locking unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key the direction indicators confirm that locking unlocking was correctly performed e Locking one flash and the door mirrors are folded in e Unlocking two flashes and the door mir rors are folded out After locking the indication is only given if all locks have been activated once the doors have been closed Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking unlock ing with light can be set in the car s menu sys tem see page 202 Search in the menu system MY CAR for Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and or Unlock confirmation light 02 Locks and
193. cs fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recommends that oil changes are car ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop Volvo uses different systems for warning of low high oil level or low high oil pressure Cer tain variants have an oil pressure sensor and then the lamp for oil pressure is used Other variants have an oil level sensor and then the 2 Only applies to petrol and 4 cyl diesel driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis play texts Certain models have both variants Contact a Volvo dealer for more information Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord ance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted If the car is driven in adverse con ditions Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade see page 378 For capacities see page 379 and onwards Dipstick and filler pipe Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting The measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme diately after the engine is switched off The dipstick will indicate that the level i
194. ction is made in the same way as for the phone see Connect an external Bluetooth device page 263 Automatic connection When the Bluetooth function is active and the last external device connected is in range it is connected automatically When the infotain ment system searches for the last device con nected its name is shown in the TV screen To connect to another device press EXIT Con nect a new external device see Change to another external device below Change to another external device It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devices in the car However the device must first have been paired see Connect an external Blue tooth device above To change to another device 1 Press MEDIA turn TUNE until Bluetooth is shown press OK MENU 2 Not supported by all mobile phones 2 Check that the external device is searcha ble visible via Bluetooth see the manual for the external device Press OK MENU Turn TUNE to Change device and con firm with OK MENU gt After a while the external device s name is shown in the TV screen If several external devices have been paired then these are also shown 5 Select the device to be connected by turn ing TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Connection of the external device takes place Change audio file by pressing Lm on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Disconnecting the device Automati
195. ctions in the centre con sole An audio source connected to the USB input can then be handled with the car s audio controls A device connected via the AUX input cannot be controlled via the car If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable bat teries is recharged when the ignition is on or the engine is running if the device is plugged into the USB connection To connect the audio source 1 Press MEDIA turn TUNE to the desired audio source USB iPod or AUX press OK MENU gt If USB is selected then Connect USB is shown in the TV screen 2 Connect your audio source to one of the connections in the centre console s stor age compartment see previous illustra tion The text Reading USB is shown in the TV screen when the system is loading the storage media s file structure Depending on the file 1 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection structure and number of files there may be some delay before loading is finished NOTE The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later To prevent damage to the USB connection this is shut off if the USB connection is short circuited or if a connected U
196. currently being received not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the selected wave length If the signal from the currently received station is weak this may prevent the radio from updating the station list If this occurs press the g yeo button while the station list is shown in the dis play screen in order to change to man ual tuning and set a frequency If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction to show the list again and press INF0 to switch The list disappears from the TV screen after a few seconds If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction and press the INEO button in the centre console to change to manual tuning or to return from manual tun ing to the function for Station list Manual tuning The preset from the factory is that the radio shows the station list of the strongest stations in the area when you turn TUNE see the sec tion Station list page 245 When the station list is shown press the giyeo button in the cen tre console to change to manual tuning This allows you to select a frequency from the list of all available radio frequencies in the selected wavelength In other words if turn TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e g 93 3 to 93 4 MHZ etc To manually select a station 1 Press the RADIO button turn TUNE until the desired wavelength AM FM1 etc is shown press OK M
197. d Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 EU Regulation no 692 2008 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra urban driving Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Extra urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km h The driving is simulated A car with D2 D3 D4 or D5 engine and 6 speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra urban driving in accordance with applicable legislation CO emissions the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions 01 10 00 11 387 01 10 OO 11 10 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Approved tyre pressures 10 Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons ECO pressure km h Front Rear Rear Front rear kPa kPa kPa kPa 205 60 R 16 O 160 280 230 260 260 260 215 55 R 16 13 B4164T3 215 50 R 17 T4 B4164T C 235 45 R 17 160 260 240 280 260 T4F B4164T2 235 40 R 18 D2 D4162T
198. d rear speakers e Balance Balance between the left and right hand speakers e Subwoofer Bass speaker level e DPL II centre level3 channel centre level Volume for centre speaker e DPL II surround level 1 evel for sur round Advanced audio settings Equalizer The volume level can be adjusted separately for different wavelengths 1 Press OK MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer Select wavelength by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU 240 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 3 Adjust the audio settings by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Con tinue in the same way with other wave lengths you want to change 4 When you have finished with audio set tings press EXIT to confirm and return to normal view For general information on menu navigation see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the driver s seat both front seats or the rear seat If there are passengers in both the front and rear seats then the option recommended is both front seats The options can be selected under Audio settings Sound stage For general information on menu navigation see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed Gener
199. d with current from another battery When jump starting the car the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage 1 Insert the remote control key in key posi tion 0 see page 78 2 Checkthat the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V 3 If the donor battery is installed in another car switch off the donor car s engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other 4 Connect one ofthe red jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s positive terminal 1 D IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment 5 Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover see page 345 6 Connect the red jump lead s other clamp onto the car s positive terminal 2 7 Connect one of the black jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s negative ter minal 3 8 Connect the other clamp to a grounding point e g right hand engine mounting at the top the outer screw head 4 9 Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure 10 Start the engine of the donor car and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx 1500 rpm 11 Start the engine in the car with the dis charged battery D IMPORTANT Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure There is a risk of sparks forming
200. d Auto Brake func tions are always enabled they cannot be deactivated On and Off To select whether the collision warning system should be switched on or off e Use the menu system MY CAR via the centre console display to search for Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning there select On or Off An activated function is tested every time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the sep arate lights for the warning lamp no 1 in the illustration on page 173 When starting the engine the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 175 ay 04 Driver support 04 176 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection Activating deactivating warning signals The warning lamp no 1 in the illustration on page 173 is activated automatically when the engine is started if Collision Warning is ena bled The warning sound can be activated deacti vated separately e Select On or Off in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning Warning sound Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed e Select one of the options from Long Normal or Short in the menu system MY CAR under Se
201. d dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left hand traffic The correct pat tern will also better illuminate the verge Active Xenon headlamps The car must be stationary with the engine run ning when the headlamp pattern is shifted between right and left hand traffic 1 Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings 2 Select between Temporary RH traffic and Temporary LH traffic For a description of the menu system see page 203 94 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Lighting Halogen headlamps e Template D horizontal line approx The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps 85 mm vertical line approx 15 mm is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens The headlamp pattern may not be as good Masking the headlamps 1 Copy the A and B templates for left hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right hand drive cars with a scale of 1 1 see page 97 e A LHD Right left hand drive right lens e B LHD Left left hand drive left lens e C RHD Right right hand drive right lens e D RHD Left right hand drive left lens 2 Transfer the template to a self adhesive waterproof material and cut it out 03 3 Position the self adhesive templates at the right distance from the edge of the head lamp lens using the illustration see page 96 and the dimensions in the fol lowing list
202. d for the gears At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration During active driving the use of a lower gear is prioritised leading to a delayed upshift Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at The information display shifts the indica tion from D to S Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually 1 Depress the brake pedal and move the gear lever from D position to the end posi tion at the instrument panel display shifts the indication from D to the figure 1 2 Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards plus twice the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3 3 Releasethe brake and accelerate carefully The gearbox winter mode means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels Kick down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration a lower gear is immediately engaged This is known as kick down If the accelerator is released from the kick down position the gearbox automatically changes up Kick down is used when maximum accelera tion is needed such as for overtaking Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine the gearbox control program has a protective
203. d to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking The function means that the brake light flashes instead of as in normal braking shining with a constant glow Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km h if the ABS system is working and or in the event of sudden braking After the car s speed has been slowed below 10 km h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button see page 92 Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur faces prior to long stay parking and after the car has been washed Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA Emergency Brake Assist helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance EBA detects the driver s braking style and increases brake force as necessary The brake force can be rein forced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced When EBA is activated the brake pedal low ers slightly more than usual depress hold the brake
204. de without detected vehicle Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y Adaptive cruise control Time interval activated during adjustment Time interval activated after adjustment DSTC Normal to enable Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system DSTC has Cruise been set in Normal mode see page 146 Cruise control Cancelled Adaptive cruise control has been deactivated the driver has to regulate the speed 04 Cruise control Unavailable Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated This could be due to e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is blocked by e g wet snow or rain Radar blocked See manual Adaptive cruise control temporarily disengaged e heradar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event that heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 160 Cruise control Service Adaptive cruise control disengaged required e Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended dd Ww Option accessory for more information see Introduction 163 ay 04 Driver support 04 164 Adaptive cruise control Press Brake To hold acoustic alarm Only with Queue Assistant
205. der for snaking to occur there must be a triggering factor e g e Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind e Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole e Sweeping steering wheel movements Operation If snaking has started it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress This makes the car trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could for example end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway TSA system continually monitors car move ments particularly lateral movements If snak ing is detected the front wheels are individually braked This serves to stabilise the car trailer combination This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action the car trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car trailer combination is once again stable the TSA sys tem stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 60 to 160 km h ea TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode see page 146 TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA system cannot determine whether
206. dicators main dipped beam trip computer Gear selector Controls for active chas sis Four C Control panel for climate control Control for infotainment and menu control Hazard warning flashers Bonnet opener 137 85 87 92 200 224 121 226 213 202 2959230 92 328 Information displays G044558 The combined instrument panel s information displays show information on some ofthe car s functions e g cruise control trip computer and messages The information is shown with text and symbols There are further descriptions under the func tions that use the information displays a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Instruments and controls __ Function Page 03 gt gt al OD 03 Your driving environment 03 12 Instruments and controls Meters G044559 Meters in the combined instrument panel Speedometer 25 Fuel gauge See also Trip computer page 224 and Refuelling page 287 e Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm Indicator and warning symbols Les OD gf y G044560 Indicator and warning symbols Main beam and direction indicator symbol warning symbols Symbol for DRIVe Start Stop see page 127 Indicator symbols Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position Il
207. driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking there will be a collision sooner or later The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision If the car is also equipped with a Collision Warning function with Auto Brake these two systems complement each other For more information on Collision Warning function with Auto Brake see page 173 D IMPORTANT Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per formed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic weather or road condi tions City Safety M does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car to small vehicles motorcycles and bicycles or to humans and animals City Safety M can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km h at a higher speed difference it is only possible to reduce collision speed In order to obtain full brake function the driver must depress the brake pedal Never wait for City Safety M to engage The driver always bears responsibility for main taining the proper distance and speed 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model z Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function Laser sensor tr
208. drives the vehicle such as vehi cle speed brake and accelerator pedal use steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts For the reasons given this informa tion may be stored in the vehicle s computers for a certain length of time but also as a result of a collision or incident This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal require ments and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider Volvo will not contribute to the above descri bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner s consent However due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such infor mation to authorities such as police authorities or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to Volvo is responsible that the information which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and main tenance is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements For further infor mation contact a Volvo dealer Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of
209. ds The function is not intended for city traffic In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning The function must not be used to extend a driving stint Always plan breaks at regular intervals and ensure that you are fully rested Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating for example e if the driver tests the LDW function e instrong side winds e onrutted road surfaces n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Some settings are made from the centre con sole display screen and its menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 202 The current status of Driver Alert can be checked on the trip computer display with the thumbwheel on the left hand stalk switch SRL e a Thumbwheel Turn until the display shows Driver Alert On the second row the options Driver Alert Standby 65 km h Driver Alert Unavailable or level mark fis can be shown OK confirms or clears a warning in the memory 04 Driver support y Driver Alert System DAC On Off The display shows a level mark with 1 5 bars WARNING To set Driver Alert in stand
210. e control system and a coordinated spacing sys tem Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the Adap tive cruise control The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal as it could become trapped The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control s set speed This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control s set speed The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way In situations that dem
211. e emplate A horizontal line approx 80 mm vertical line approx 20 mm e emplate B horizontal line approx 80 mm vertical line approx 4 mm e Template C horizontal line approx 120 mm vertical line approx 4 mm gt gt es CD 03 Your driving environment Lighting Aligning the templates 03 co N M e o o Upper row left hand drive cars templates A and B Lower row right hand drive cars templates C and D COO 03 Your driving environment B Lighting Templates for halogen headlamps CD 03 Your driving environment 03 98 Wipers and washing Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers Rain sensor on off 2 Thumbwheel sensitivity frequency Windscreen wipers off 0 Move the stalk switch to position O to switch off the windscreen wipers Single sweep Zu Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep Intermittent wiping INT Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter mittent wiping is selected Continuous wiping NU The wipers sweep at normal speed NA Y The wipers sweep at high speed D IMPORTANT Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind screen and rear window is scraped away D IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cl
212. e deacti vate the alarm to open the doors and to drive the car The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff the loose key blade is retained by the car o N A Lo t o G017869 Activating privacy locking To activate privacy locking Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover A over the cargo area before closing the tail E Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock gate see page 296 cylinder p Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise The keyhole is vertical in the locked posi tion for privacy locking fe Pull out the key blade The information dis play shows a message at the same time The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button o N co N o o Active locks for remote control key without key blade and privacy locking activated The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service with a hotel parking valet or similar The glovebox is then Option accessory for more information see Introduction 49 02 Locks and alarm Privacy locking 02 Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key but keep it in a safe place instead e Deactivation takes place in reverse order For information on locking the glovebox only see page 59 50 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks
213. e engine Depress the brake and or clutch pedal and then press the START button again Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage e Stop the car on as flat level ground as possible if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel Condensation can disrupt engine opera tion The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel D IMPORTANT Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter Diesel particle filter DPF Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter which results in more efficient emission con trol The particles in the exhaust gases are col lected in the filter during normal driving So called regeneration is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature Regeneration of the filter is automatic and nor mally takes 10 20 minutes It may take a little longer at a low average speed Fuel consump tion may increase slightly during regeneration Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature This means that regeneration of the diesel part
214. e engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e g stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automat ically when the journey is due to continue The Start Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto matically whenever appropriate Manual or Automatic Note that there are differences in the Start Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic DRIVe Start Stop AUTO START il Start Stop On Off 2 Illuminates briefly on activation and for text messages The engine is auto stopped DRIVE The Start Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key The driver is alerted to the function by means of this symbol on the instru ment panel illuminating briefly the display text Auto Start Stop ON is shown and the green lamp for the On Off button illuminates All of the car s normal systems such as lighting radio etc work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically except that some equipment may have the function tem porarily reduced e g the climate control sys i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment QD 03 gt gt 127 OD 03
215. e fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled When 1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME but further amounts must not be added refuelling check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork Wash off any spillage with deter gent and water D IMPORTANT Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm D IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels that must not be used e Special additives e Marine diesel fuel e Heating oil e FAME Fatty Acid Methyl Ester and vegetable oil These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo 07 warranty Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel the 07 290 07 During your journey tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star vation the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check Do this before starting the engine once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position see page 78 2 Pressthe START button without depress ing the brake and or clutch pedal 3 Wait approx 1 minute To start th
216. e influenced see page 11 No guaranteed range remains when the display shows km to empty tank Refuel as soon as possible NOTE There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed Resetting 1 Select km h average speed or 1 100km average 224 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Trip computer 2 Press and hold RESET for approx 1 second to reset the selected function If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously Current speed The instrument panel display changes to show current speed in mph miles per hour if the speedometer is graduated in km h If the speedometer is graduated in mph then the dis play changes to km h 1 Only certain markets 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D i A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 225 C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 226 Adapting driving characteristics Active chassis Four C Active chassis Four C Continously Controlled Chassis Concept regulates the characteris tics of the shock absorbers so that the car s driving characteristics can be adjusted There are three settings Comfort Sport and Advanced Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces Shock absorption is soft and the movement o
217. e information on a prevailing speed limit e g name signs for towns districts are not recorded by the RSI function Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function e Faded signs Signs positioned on bends Rotated or damaged signs Concealed or poorly positioned signs Signs completely or partly covered with frost snow and or dirt n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support as Road sign information RSI 04 149 as 04 Driver support Speed limiter General information on the speed limiter A speed limiter Speed Limiter can be regar ded as a reverse cruise control the driver reg ulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre selected set speed by the speed limiter Operation 04 Steering wheel keypad and display Speed limiter On Off 2 Standby mode ceases and stored speed resumes each extra press gives 1 km h Standby mode Activate and adjust the maximum speed each press gives 5 km h Stored maximum speed in brackets Standby mode Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is FELIS active the display will show its T1 FX symbol in combination with the set maximum speed UN 70 Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary While driving 1 Press the
218. e page 160 the more lines the longer the time interval One line corre The set time interval is also used by the sponds to adaptive cruise control function see page 156 approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approximately 3 seconds Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations Strong sunlight reflections or strong varia tions in light intensity as well as wearing The number of lines for the sunglasses could mean that the warning selected time interval is light in the windscreen cannot be seen shown during the setting itself Poor weather or winding roads could affect and for several seconds after the radar sensor s capacity to detect vehi wards Then a smaller scale cles in front version of Ie symbols The size of other vehicles could also affect poa o tie rignt ortie dig detection capacity e g motorcycles This play The same symbol is also shown when could mean that the warning lamp illumi adaptive cruise control is activated nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent 04 Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range 166 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y Distance Warning Symbols and messages in the display Set time interval during adjustment
219. e the function is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt BLIS For a description of the menu system see page 202 BLIS When BLIS is deactivated the lamp in the but ton goes out and a message is shown in the instrument panel display When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash 3 times Press the OK button to delete the text message For a description of messages see page 200 When BLIS operates The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km h Overtaking The system is designed to react if e you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km h faster than the other vehicle e youare overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km h faster than you are travelling BLIS does not work in sharp bends BLIS does not work when the car is revers ing A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes It can pre vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS Blind Spot Information System Daylight and darkness In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars trucks buses and motorcycles In darkness the system reacts to the head lamps of surrounding vehicles If the head lamps of surrounding vehicle
220. ea the rear seat backrest can be folded down see page 82 The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area Hard sharp and or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps le V MAX leOW G043907 Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and Lower the cover to access the electrical prevents them from overturning and spreading socket their contents across the cargo area e The socket also provides voltage when the 1 Foldupthe holder which is part of the floor iid control key is not in the ignition hatch 2 Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks Hemember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car s battery Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 During your journey 07 293 07 During your journey The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo For information on the use of Volvo s recommended temporary emergency puncture repair TMK see page 321 07 07 During your journey Cargo area Safety net Storage space safety net cassettes A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes has a
221. eadlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align ment of the headlamp beam which could daz zle oncoming motorists Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden 1 Leavethe engine running or have the car s electrical system in key position I G043764 2 Roll the thumbwheel up down to raise lower beam alignment Overview headlamp control Overview headlamp control a Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Gp Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Cars with active Xenon headlamps have auto instrument lighting instrument lighting matic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel Rear fog lamp Rear fog lamp Headlamp control Headlamp control Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position see page 78 The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel 1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps 86 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment QD Lighting RES aly Specification RUE control with AUTO mode Dipped beam Dipped beam off Main beam can be activated Main beam flash operates in 03 this position 0 02 Position parking lamps ED Di
222. eaning the windscreen The wind screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page 341 and 361 Rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen The sensitivity of 1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 341 service position wiper blade see page 341 and filling washer fluid see page 343 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel When the rain sensor is activated a light in the button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right hand display in the combined instrument panel Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or Il while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button The windscreen wipers make one sweep Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi tivity and downward for lower sensitivity An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but ton or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program
223. ears to be undamaged In addition replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged The new seatbelt must be type approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt co o o e A ag omg Le over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen It must never be allowed to ride upward Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible In addition check that there are no twists in the seatbelt As the pregnancy progresses pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel The aim should be to posi tion the seat with as large a distance as possi ble between abdomen and steering wheel The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy But it is crucial that it be worn in the ys M 01 Safety Seatbelts Seatbelt reminder o A N N pes o o Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder The audio reminder is speed dependent and in some cases time depend ent The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel Child seats are not c
224. eatbelt into the buckle on the driver s side Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func tion as intended in the event of a collision There is a risk of serous injury G044584 The warning symbol in the combined instru ment panel illuminates when the remote con trol key is in key position Il The symbol clears after approx 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault free If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv ing it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality The symbol indi cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys tem SIPS the IC system or some other fault in the system Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately As well as the warning symbol a message may appear on the information display in appropri ate cases If the warning symbol malfunctions the warning triangle illuminates and SRS Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag Service urgent appears in the display Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately G018665 Airbag system left hand drive car Airbags o o o co o o Airbag system right hand drive car The system consists of airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent
225. eather in sunny weather with cool outside tempera tures 05 to direct heat or cold to the floor to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot dry weather C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 220 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater Fuel driven heater General information about the parking heater The parking heater heats the engine and pas senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer Two different times can be selected using the timer Here time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready The car s electronic sys tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature The heater cannot start if the outside tempera ture exceeds 15 C At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right hand wheel hous ing which is perfectly normal Refuelling Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel A level is too low the parking heater will be tt ry As switched off automatically and a message IN A appears on the information display Acknowl VOLVO 31301658 b edge the message by pressing the indicator stalk OK button once see page 221 D IMPORTANT Repeated use of the parking
226. ed or semi universal categories U Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class UF Suitable for front facing universally approved child seats in this weight class B Built in child seats approved for this weight class S 01 Safety 01 36 Child safety Integrated two stage booster cushions G043980 h Correct position the seatbelt should be posi tioned in on the shoulder G045668 Incorrect position the head restraint must b adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder The booster cushions are specially designed to provide optimum safety In combination with the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height Check before driving that e the integrated 2 stage booster cushion is correctly set see table page 36 and in locked position e the seatbelt is in contact with the child s body and is not slack or twisted e the seatbelt does not lie across the child s throat or below the shoulder see preced ing illustrations e thelap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro tection For instructions on adjusting the booster cush ion s two levels see pages 36 37 Raising the two stage booster cushion The integrated booster cushion can be folded up into two stages How many stages the cush ion should be folded up depends on the ch
227. eed 5 are cleared The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the D button The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limita tion 04 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 151 ty 04 Driver support Cruise control General information on CC The cruise control CC Cruise Control helps the driver maintain an even speed resulting in a more relaxed driving on motorways and long straight roads in regular traffic flows The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a 04 suitable speed and or suitable distance The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely Operation The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter 1 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market 152 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction G043656 Go21411 The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter 1 Cruise control On Off e Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed O Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Activating and setting the speed To enable cruise control e Press the steering wheel b
228. een Green flashing Charging in pro ress WARNING 2 The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt 8 Green Fully charged the driver from responsibility It is always the o responsibility of the driver to be sober and 4 Nozzle for breath test KELON SAO to drive the car safely 2 BER Red Discharged fit the charger in the holder 3 Transmission button or Mi uM the 4 Lamp for battery status power supply cable 5 Lamp for result of breath test from the glovebox 6 Lamp indicates ready for breath test Store the Alcolock in its holder This will keep the built in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened 1 Also called Alcoguard wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 109 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Storage Handheld unit storage and charging station e The handheld alcolock unit is released by depressing it slightly in its holder and releasing it it then springs out and can be removed from the holder e Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in until it engages e Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged Before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened 1 When the indicator lamp 6 is green the Alcolock is ready for use 2 Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder If t
229. el when the engine is switched off see page 200 WARNING If the message Oil service required is shown visit a workshop The oil level may be too high 09 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment Measuring the oil level In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0 5 Ltr only fill with 0 5 litres The oil level is only detected by the system during driving The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 appears as shown in the illustration below The level must never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below 1 Activate key position Il see page 78 2 Rotate the thumbwheel on the left hand stalk switch to position Engine oil level Wait gt You will then see information displayed about the engine oil level I Im x 2 PEZ a CIE lip Des lt a p LEASE Lo 20 140 2 AY D gt XI000 R MIN i G044551 The figures 1 4 represent filling level Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 is shown Recom mended filling level is 4 Checking the level and topping up a e
230. elected speed If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to the standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front then the driver is warned by Distance Warning see page 165 about the short distance WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis tance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions Read the whole of this section for informa tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise control The driver must be familiar with this information before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed even when the adaptive cruise control is being used IMPORTANT Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control s Queue Assistant see page 159 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may differ depending on car model e Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function Function overview ap Warning lamp braking by driver required Steering wheel keypad Radar sensor Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruis
231. elevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Malta Hawnhekk Alpine Electronics Inc jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Hungary Alul rott Alpine Electronics Inc nyilatkozom hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak gt gt 10 Poland Portugal Slovenia Slovakia Finland Sweden Iceland Norway 10 Specifications Type approval county OOO Niniejszym Alpine Electronics Inc o wiadcza e Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Alpine Electronics Inc declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE Alpine Electronics Inc izjavlja da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Alpine Electronics Inc t mto vyhlasuje Ze Bluetooth Module sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES Alpine Electronics Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen H rmed intygar Alpine Electronics Inc att denna Bluetooth Module st
232. en the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 km h Some audio files that are copy protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player DVD video discs For playback of DVD video discs see page 254 Fast forward reverse Hold in the buttons ES to fast forward rewind Audio files are fast forwarded rewound at one speed while video files are fast forwar ded rewound at several speeds Repeatedly press the buttons Het PA o to increase the fast Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Media player 06 253 06 Infotainment system 06 254 Media player forward rewind speed for video files Release the button to return to viewing at normal speed Scan This function plays the first ten seconds of each disc track audio file To scan 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Scan gt The first 10 seconds of each disc track or audio file are played 3 Cancel the scan with EXIT the disc track or audio file being played back will con tinue playing Random This function plays the tracks in random order To listen to the tracks in random order 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Random 3 Pres
233. enance and service 09 342 Wiper blades and washer fluid e N a o o Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm Slide in the new wiper blade until a click is heard Check that the blade is firmly installed 4 Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind screen The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to set the car s electrical system to key position I or when the car is started The wiper blades are different lengths The blade on the driver s side is longer than the blade on the passenger side G045581 Fold out the wiper arm 2 Grip the inner section of the blade by the arrow 3 Turn anticlockwise to use the blade s end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily 4 Press the new wiper blade into position Check that it is firmly installed 5 Lower the wiper arm Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen see page 361 and onwards D IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly Neglected maintenance shortens the serv ice life of the wiper blades 09 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid 09 Filling washer fluid a 7 Y a jo The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoi
234. enger airbag PACOS is located on the passenger end of the instru ment panel and is accessible when the pas senger door is open see under the heading below Activating deactivating Check that the switch is in the required posi tion Volvo recommends that the remote con trol key s key blade be used to change posi tion For information on the key blade see page 48 Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger the life of passengers in the car If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag but does not have a PACOS switch Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch then the airbag will always be activated Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas senger seat if the message in the roof con sole see page 23 indicates that the air bag is deactivated and if the warning sym bol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel This indi cates that there has been a severe malfunc tion Visit a workshop as soon as possible Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop Activating deactivating PASSENGER AIRBAG Switch location The airbag is activated With the switch in this position persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front p
235. environment 03 78 Key positions Insert and remove the remote control G045198 Ignition switch with remote control key extracted inserted For cars with the Keyless function the key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e g a pocket For more information on Keyless functions see page 53 Insert the key 1 Hold the end of the remote control key with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch 2 Then press the key in the lock up to its end position D IMPORTANT Foreign objects in the ignition switch may 0 jeopardise the function or destroy the lock Do not press the remote control key incor rectly turned Hold the end with the detach able key blade see page 48 Withdraw the key e Push the remote control key allow it to eject then pull it out from the ignition l switch Functions at different levels In order to enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off the Il car s electrical system can be set in 3 different levels key positions 0 I and II with the remote control key Throughout this owner s manual these levels are described using the denomination key positions The following table shows the functions avail able in each key position level E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Odometer clock and tem perature gauge are illumi nated Power seats
236. er for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance 07 07 During your journey General information on loading Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed infor mation on weights see page 373 US The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote con trol key see page 59 The car s driving characteristics change depending on the weight and distribution of the load To bear in mind when loading e Position the load firmly against the rear seat s backrest Note that objects must not preventthe function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat s backrests is folded down see 07 page 27 e Centre the load e Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests e Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery e Secure all loads to the load retaining eye lets with straps or web lashings A loose object weighing 20 kg can in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro
237. er Car settings gt Lock settings Keyless entry there select between All doors unlock Any door Doors on same side and Both front doors For a description of the menu system see page 202 Antenna location G046342 The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car Rear bumper centre Door handle left rear Cargo area central and furthest in under the floor Door handle right rear O Centre console under the rear section 9 Centre console under the front section n T Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive 02 99 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive WARNING 02 People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system s antennae with their pacemaker This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system 56 Option accessory for more information see Introduction From the outside The remote control key can lock unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously Different sequences for unlocking can be selected see Unlocking with the remote control key page 46 In order that the lock sequence can be acti vated the driver s door must be closed if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open then it they is are locked and the alarm is activated only when it they are closed With the Key less system all the doo
238. erheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Anautomatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed e Inthe event of overheating a warning sym bol illuminates on the instrument panel combined with a text message follow the recommendation given Steep inclines e Donotlock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine can cope with it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions D IMPORTANT See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 125 Parking on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake e D Activate the parking brake Move the gear selector to position P Release the foot brake Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer Always use the parking brake Block the wheels with chocks when park ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill Starting on a hill 1 2 Depress the foot brake Move the gear selector to driving posi tion D Release the parking brake Release the foot brake and start driving off Towing bracket If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar the installation instructions for the loose sec tion must be followed carefully see page 301 If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar Follow the in
239. erse order WARNING Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Power seat Front edge of seat cushion up down Seat forward backward and up down Backrest rake The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object If this happens go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again Only one movement forward back up down can be made at a time Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con 2 For key memory for Keyless function see page 55 trol key without the key in the ignition switch Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi tion land can always be made when the engine is running Seat with memory function G021134 Store setting Memory button Memory button Memory button O Button for storing settings 1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors 2 Hold the button depressed to store set tings while depressing one of the memory buttons Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop Key memory in remo
240. ert System LDW 04 gt gt 185 Y 04 Driver support Driver Alert System LDW The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car s wheels Symbols and messages in the display ci A y amp Lane departure warning The function is switched on off amp ON Lane departure warn shown at switch on off y ing OFF The text disappears after 5 seconds Lane Depart Warn Standby The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km h lt 65 km h Lane Depart Warn Unavail The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged able Head about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 Lane Depart Warn Availa The function scans the carriageway s side markings ble 186 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y Driver Alert System LDW Windscreen Sensors blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required Personal preferences Settings are made from the centre console s display screen via the menu system in MY CAR From there search and locate Settings gt Car settings Driver support systems Lane Departure Warning For information on how the menu system is used see page 202 Select from the options e On at start up The function enters standby mode every time the engine is The
241. es not have normal M A operating temperature outside temperature is below M A freezing point or above approx 30 C the environment in the passenger M A compartment differs from the preset values indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed Conditions the car is reversed battery temperature is below freezing point or above approx 55 C the driver makes greater steering wheel movements the exhaust system s particulate filter is full the temporarily dis engaged Start Stop function is reactivated once an automatic cleaning cycle has been per formed see page 290 the road is very steep a trailer is connected electrically to the car s electrical system the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500 2000 metres above sea level the cur rent air pressure varies with the prevailing weather conditions adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated 03 Your driving environment DRIVe Start Stop M A M A M A M A M A M A the driver s door has been A opened with the gear selector in D position the gear selector is moved out of A the D position to S position or fes A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox B Sport mode The engine auto starts An engine that has stopped automatically may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue In the following cases the engine also starts auto
242. essing a number key in the centre console when the text wheel is shown see illustration above a new character list 1 appears in the TV screen Continue repeatedly pressing the number key to the desired letter and then release Continue with the next letter and so on When a button is depressed the entry is confirmed when another button is depressed To enter a number hold in the corresponding number key Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 268 Option accessory for more information see Introduction New contact Entering letters for New contact Changing the input mode see table below Q Input field New contacts can be added in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone book New contact There is no text wheel for High Performance so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this Bluetooth handsfree 1 When the Name row is selected press OK MENU to reach the input mode illus tration above 2 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used 3 Continue with the next letter and so on The name entered is shown in the input field 2 in the TV screen 4 To change the input mode to numbers special characters change between uppercase lowercase lette
243. evatele teistele asjakohastele satetele UK Hereby Alpine Electronics Inc declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Spain Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics Inc declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Greece ME THN MAPOY2A Alpine Electronics Inc AHAQNEI OTI Bluetooth Module 2YMMOP ONETAI MPO2 TI2 OYZIOAEIZ ANAITH2EI2 KAI TIZ AOINES ZXETIKE2 AIATA EIZ TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK France Par la pr sente Alpine Electronics Inc d clare que l appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Italy Con la presente Alpine Electronics Inc dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latvia Ar So Alpine Electronics Inc deklare ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajjem noteikumiem Lithuania iuo Alpine Electronics Inc deklaruoja kad Sis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Nether Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics Inc dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere lands r
244. ey are correctly inserted Check the lighting The headlamp must be mounted and the con nector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch Removing the cover D i iD e Y o o Before starting to replace a bulb see page 335 1 Unscrew the cover s four screws with the tool 1 in the tool kit see page 310 They should not be detached completely 8 4 turns are sufficient D IMPORTANT Use the tool in the toolkit to remove and attach this correctly 2 Slide the cover to one side 3 Remove the cover Reinstall the cover in reverse order Dipped beam halogen Ld o I i e Y a o Detach the headlamp see page 335 Remove the cover Unplug the connector from the bulb Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out Sr ee X qu ut The guide pin on the lamp should be straight up when it is fitted and a clicking sound should be heard when it clicks into place Reinstall the parts in reverse order 09 Maintenance and service 09 Direction indicators G043557 G043558 1 Detach the headlamp 1 Detach the headlamp 1 Detach the headlamp Remove the cover see page 336 2 Remove the cover see page 336 2 Detach the cover by pulling it straight out Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise 3 Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise 3 Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the and then pulling straight
245. f 224 Adapting drivil eschisrdgeteriel Teste eter erm nt cto 226 Comfort inside the passenger compartment 227 198 Option accessory for more information see Introduction COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE g C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 200 Menus and messages Combined instrument panel 1000km to empty tank Po Sere G046221 i Information disp OK access to message list and message confirmation Thumbwheel browse between menu options e RESET reset the active function Used in certain cases to select activate a function see the explanation under each respective function The menus shown on the information displays in the combined instrument panel are con trolled with the left hand stalk switch The menus shown depend on key position see page 78 If a message appears then this must 1 Only certain markets 2 Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off 3 Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be shown Menu overview Some ofthe following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car km to empty tank 1 100km average l 100km instantaneous km h average speed km h current speed Engine oil level Wait Tyre pressure Calibration Park heat timer Direct start Park heat ON Additional heat auto ON Lane Depart Warn
246. f the body is smooth and gentle Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised Operation Chassis settings Use the buttons in the centre console to change setting The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated next time the engine is started Speed related power steering Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt Steering wheel force and select Low Medium or High For a description of the menu system see page 202 This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Comfort inside the passenger compartment Storage s
247. figure below and an arrow in front of each part of the 1 Only applies to ECC figure shows the air distribution that is selected For more information on air distribu tion see page 219 G043725 f The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console TV screen AUTO The Auto function automati cally regulates temperature air conditioning fan speed recirculation and air distribu tion If you select one or more manual functions the other functions continue to be controlled auto matically All manual settings are disengaged 216 Option accessory for more information see Introduction when AUTO is pressed The TV screen shows AUTO CLIMATE Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment Choose between Low Normal or High e Low Automatic fan control Low airflow is prioritised e Normal Automatic fan control e High Automatic fan control A more intense airflow is prioritised For a description of the menu system see page 203 Temperature control The temperature can be adjusted with the knob For ECC the temperature for the driver s side and the passen g ger side can be set sepa rately When the car is started the most recent setting is resumed 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a
248. fluid filling 343 visere MR inini 99 Water and dirt repellent coating 101 Water repellent surface cleaning 362 o a TS 362 Weights kerb Weight ss 373 Wheels o e 315 pac reino o RR 316 WS e E E 311 SHOW GNAN S aicsin 312 spare Wheel uns 314 Wheels and tyres 310 Whiplash injury WHIPS 27 WHIPS child seat booster cushion 27 whiplash IBI ES sand 27 Windows rearview and door mirrors 101 Windscreen washing 99 Windscreen wipers 98 falli SED AAA 98 WIE AVINO es 285 WS ES anae 312 Wiper Dates semitam reddis 341 eigo go MN T 341 e i r WI A nn 342 replacing rear window 342 service DOSIEOF ii sooo tein ori taeranca 341 Wipers and washing 98 Volvo Car Corporation TP 15239 English AT 1224 Printed in Sweden G teborg 2012 Copyright 2000 2012 Volvo Car Corporation
249. for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out another scan and save a new preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK MENU gt An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a pre set is shown When the scan is com plete a message is shown and the pic ture is shown A preset list max 30 pre sets has now been created and is avail able To change channel see page 276 Scanning the TV channels This function automatically scans through the frequency range for all channels available in the area where you are When a channel is found it is shown for approx 10 seconds before scanning is resumed Scanning is stopped with EXIT then the channel that you just watched continues to be shown Scanning does not affect the preset list Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu Scan Teletext It is possible to read Teletext Follow these steps 1 Pressthe button on the remote con trol 2 Enter the page number 3 digits with the number keys 0 9 to select page The page is shown automatically Enter new page number or press the remote control buttons B to go to the next page Return to TV sc
250. for programming 1 Aimthe original remote control towards the HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it 5 14 cm from the button Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink 2 Depress the button on the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash ing Both the buttons must be released when the indicator lamp flashes quickly a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 03 141 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 142 3 2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer Depress the HomeLink button being programmed hold it depressed for 5 seconds and then release it Repeat if necessary until the garage door is acti vated If the door is not activated press the programmed HomeLink button and hold it depressed and check the indicator lamp Constant glow The indicator lamp illu minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indicates that the programming is complete The garage door gate or similar should now be activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Glow not constant The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow In which case continue with the programming steps 4 6 in order to com
251. fter the tone with normal voice at normal speed e Do not speak while the system is replying the system cannot understand commands during this time e The car s doors windows and sunroof must be closed e Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment If the driver is unsure of which command to use he she can say Help the system then responds with a few different com mands which can be used in the current sit uation Voice commands can be disabled by saying Cancel not speaking a long press on the steering wheel but ton for Voice recognition Press EXIT or another main source but ton e g MEDIA i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Help functions for voice recognition e Instructions A function that helps you get familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands e Voice training A function that enables the voice recognition system to learn to know your voice and your accent The function provides an opportunity to voice train two user profiles The help functions can be accessed by press ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in the centre console and then turning TUNE to the desired menu option Instructions The instructions can be started in two ways NOTE This instruction and voice training can only be started when the car is parked e Press the button for Voice recognition and say Voice instructions e Activate the inst
252. g Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dim ming The compass can only be specified for rear view mirrors with automatic dimming see page 106 n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Windows rearview and door mirrors 03 105 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 106 Compass Operation e o Rearview mirror with compass The upper right hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations N north NE north east E east SE south east S south SW south west W west and NW north west The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position Il see page 78 To deactivate activate the compass press in the button on the underside of the mir ror using a paper clip for example Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones Proceed as follows 1 Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high voltage power lines 2 Start the car For optimum ca
253. g the fuel filler flap G045860 Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel the flap opens when the button is released The arrow on the information display s symbol reminds which side of the car the fuel filler cap is located e Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a click confirms that it is closed Opening the fuel filler flap manually LO CUM LS The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible 1 Open remove the side hatch in the cargo area same side as fuel filler flap 2 Expand open a perforated section in the isolation and locate a green cord with han dle 3 Pullthe cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a click D MPORTAN Pull the wire gently minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock Opening closing the fuel cap Bm Lil VOLVO 31301658 p L The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures Open the cap slowly e After refuelling refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard Filling up with fuel e Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out NOTE Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather 07 During your journey Refuelling 07 07 During your journey
254. gine run ning time and oil grade If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts contact a work shop Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible The gearbox cannot handle full capacity Drive carefully until the message clears If shown repeatedly contact a workshop Transmission hot Reduce speed Transmission hot Stop safely Temporarily OFF Low battery Power save mode the problem has arisen page 125 Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears Critical fault Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and con tact a workshop A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset auto matically while driving or after starting again The audio system is switched off to save energy Charge the bat tery A Part of message shown together with information on where B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended C For more messages concerning automatic transmission see C3 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Menu source MY CAR General information on MY CAR Many of the car s functions are handled in this menu source such as setting the clock door mirrors and locks Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons on the centre console or with the steer ing wheel s right hand keypad
255. hanol and natural rubber latex Harmful if ingested Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact Avoid contact with the skin and eyes Store out of the reach of children 08 Wheels and tyres A 326 lare ln A 328 Etage Ne cere MEER 335 WIRE DIARIES AHODWASD CY Tic mestre 2 s eene nere n nnn nnn nnn nenne 341 DAT E Mares meme cea seis eR ERE E C E MERE E Cr eer re nei 344 0SQS MODO nhe Que tt men Fw e mme re r 350 GariCare Moe Rer ee ft at 361 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 3f i ASS E oT X e T n n Ms d S de y s LM d V HE AN R s y ee is l L Ah x Lo 9 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment General Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi ble follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work Volvo workshops have the personnel special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals e g when refuelling e Coolant e Engine oil e Power steering fluid e Washer fluid Hemember that the radiator fan
256. hausted batter ies in an environmentally safe manner n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system PC 282 Recommendations during driving 284 BEU O r ee 287 FUEL A o EET 288 Ker GB ceu ere ai a 292 FASE IEA nn Seem cbs Mas rrr een E EET RETE CO a 295 Diving with MANIERE See ren age am mere 298 owing and reca el sore nee me a 304 DURING YOUR JOURNEY 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving General Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions e Drive in the highest gear possible adapted to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption e Avoid driving with open windows e Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking e Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel con sumption e Use engine braking to slow down when it can take place without risk to other road users e Aroof load and ski box increase air resis tance leading to higher fuel consumption remove the load carriers when not in use e Do not run the engine to operating tem perature at idling speed but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one e
257. he Alcolock is outside the car when it is n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch 2 Fold up the nozzle 1 take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a click is heard after approx 5 seconds The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test If no message is shown then the transmis sion to the car may have failed in which case press the button 3 to transmit the result to the car manually Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes otherwise it must be repeated Result after breath test Indicator lamp 5 Display text Green lamp Alco guard Approved test Yellow lamp Alco guard Approved test Red lamp Disap proved test Wait 1 minute Specification Start the engine no alcohol content measured Engine starting pos sible measured alcohol content is above 0 1 promille but below the limit value in force Engine starting not possible measured alcohol content is above the limit value in force A Limits vary between countries so find out what limits apply See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page 109 After a completed period of driving the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath te
258. he external device can be controlled from the car Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically If the last connected mobile phone is not available then the system will try to connect a mobile phone that was paired earlier When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the TV screen Manual connection If you want to change the connected mobile phone go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Change phone Change to another external device It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devices in the car However the device must first have been registered to the car see Connect an external Bluetooth device To change to another device 1 Check that the external device is searcha ble visible via Bluetooth see the manual for the external device i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 2 Press TEL and then select Change phone gt The car searches for previously con nected devices The external devices detected are specified with their respec tive Bluetooth name in the TV screen 3 Select the device to be connected by turn ing TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Connection of the external device takes place To call 1 Make sure that the ra symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone
259. he heat coating the o Courtesy lighting reflector and then causing damage 3 Glovebox lighting General interior lighting in the roof Headlamps front All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment Loosen and remove the Reading lamps whole headlamp Side position position lamps rear Brake light LED lights general WARNING Removing the headlamp 1 Setthe car s electrical system in key posi tion 0 see page 78 2 First illustration On cars with Xenon headlamps the E Pull out the headlamp s locking pins replacement of Xenon lamps must be car ried out at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit pa Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out D IMPORTANT Do not pull the electrical cable only the con nector 09 Maintenance and service 09 3 9 Second illustration E Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb E gt At the same time guide out the con nector with your other hand Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens Replace the bulb in question o e 5 o Plug in the connector a clicking sound should be heard Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins The short pin is fitted closest to the grille Check that th
260. he last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released Automatic standby mode The Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems e g DSTC see page 146 If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead An automatic deactivation can be due to e engine speed is too low high e speed falls below 30 km h e wheels lose traction e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is covered e g by wet snow or heavy rain radar waves blocked Resume set speed Cruise control in standby mode is re activated with one press on the steering wheel button D the speed is then set to the last stored speed NOTE A significant increase in speed may arise after the speed has been resumed with D 6 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode 7 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant it manages right down to stationary 8 On left flash only in left hand drive car or right flash in right hand drive car i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Overtaking another vehicle When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an imminent overtake with the direction indicator the
261. higher lower temperature than the actual temperature required AC Air conditioning on off When the lamp in the AC but ton illuminates the air condi tioning is controlled by the system s automatic function This way incoming air is cooled and dehumidified When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected Other functions are still controlled automatically When the max defroster function is activated the air conditioning is switched on automati cally so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi mum setting AC Max defroster Used to quickly remove mist ing and ice from the wind screen and side windows Air flowing to the windows The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active W The following also takes place in order to pro vide maximum dehumidification in the passen ger compartment e the air conditioning is automatically engaged e recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged NOTE The noise level increases as the fan is oper ating at max When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings Recirculation Recirculation When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates The function is selected to shut out bad air exhaust gases etc from the passenger com partment The air in the pas senger compartme
262. hown in the pop up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed it can be e g CD DVD data menu or USB menu 190nly applies to DVD video discs x Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment 06 gt gt 243 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment Phone settings Discoverable Sounds and volume Download phone book Bluetooth software version in car Call options Auto answer Voicemail number Disconnect phone 06 Er rn Centre console controls for radio functions 1 RADIO button for selecting the wavelength AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 DAB2 Station presets 0 9 e Select the desired frequency station or navigate in the radio menu by turning TUNE Confirm your selection or go to the radio menu by pressing OK MENU E Hold in the button for next previous avail able station Short press for preset 1 Does not apply to Performance If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 Menus The menus inRADIO are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion
263. hree different devices e g garage door opener alarm sys tem outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc and in doing so replace their remote controls For more information on HomeLink visit www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 WARNING e f HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate make sure that there is no one in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is moving e The car should remain outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed e Do not use HomeLink for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse Save the original remote controls for future programming e g when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle It is also rec ommended that the programming for the but tons is deleted when the car is sold See the section Resetting the HomeLink buttons on page 142 1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls Inc Programming HomeLink In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in accessory position before HomeLink can be programmed or used If possible fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal The HomeLink buttons should be reset before programming When this has been done HomeLink is set in learn mode and ready
264. ia DAV 252 Memory function in seats 81 Menu navigation Infotainment 238 Menus functions 204 Menus and messages 200 Menu system MY CAR 202 Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 162 Collision Warning with Auto ISO A 171 179 Distance Alert 167 Driver Alert Control 183 Lane Departure Warning 186 Messages in BLIS 196 Messages in the combined instrument laci T 200 Messages in the information display 147 Meters ju Re ile 72 speedometer 12 is else nic NT T 12 MIGEODPOLIG suas ii sus scetseunsianemntes ovcixennesus 262 POSTING A H en 217 attending to the windows 210 condensation in headlamps 361 remove with the air vents 219 timer TUN CHO a c 217 Mobile phone COMIN er E E 263 o Se 262 register phone 263 VOICE COM OI eee 271 Mood Ondas DM M 93 MY CAR 202 Oil see also Engine oil 378 Ol level Oscars 329 OVemeatMd mesones 298 Owner s manual environmental labelling 12 PAC O a m A 22 PACOS SMIC 22 Paintwork ColOU COUR ne 365 damage and touch up
265. ible For more information see page 119 E85 D Without Start Stop E With Start Stop Explanation EZ Extra urban driving Fuel consumption and emissions of CO yam A e ption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles ETE litre 100 km that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment The car s weight may increase depending on equipment If the consumption and emission data is This as well as how heavily the car is loaded missing then it is included in the enclosed increases fuel consumption and carbon diox supplement ide emissions Combined driving Urban driving 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 EU Regulation no 692 2008 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra urban driving Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Extra urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km h The driving is simulated A car with D2 D3 D4 or D5 engine and 6 speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra urban driving in accordance with applicable legislation CO emissions the exhaus
266. ible file formats via the USB connection Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection Audio format mp3 wma aac m4a Video format divx avi asf A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Media Bluetooth NOTE General The car s media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with Bluetooth such as mobile phones and PDAs Navigation and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad In some external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device To play back the audio the car s media player must first be set in Bluetooth mode The Bluetooth media player must support the Audio Video Remote Control Profile AVRCP and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile A2DP The player should use AVRCP version 1 3 A2DP 1 2 Otherwise some functions may not work Not all mobile phones and external media players available in the market are fully com patible with the Bluetooth function in the car s media player Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones and external media players The car s media player can only play the audio files
267. icle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction When the filter has become approximately 80 full of particles a warning triangle on the instrument panel illuminates and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown on the instrument panel display Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem perature preferably on a main road or motor way The car should then be driven for approx imately 20 minutes more NOTE A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically Use the parking heater in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera ture more quickly D IMPORTANT If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter will be incapable of functioning Then there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced 07 During your journey Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car s weight See information on weights page 373 and table page 384 The manner in which the car is driven and other non technical factors can also affect fuel consumption Consumption is higher and power output low
268. ides better protection against break ins and improved sound insu lation in the passenger compartment The windscreen and other windows have lami nated glass 03 Water and dirt repellent coating S3 Windows are treated with a coating that improves the view in difficult weather conditions Maintenance see his Areas where IR film is not applied page 362 Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice A 40 mm E id Sees control E did from the windows Use the defroster to G amp D Switch for electric child safety locks and remove ice from the mirrors see page 104 B 80 mm disengaging rear power window buttons see page 62 The windscreen is equipped with a heat Rear window controls reflecting film IR that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment 9 Front window controls The positioning of electronic equipment such UAR as a transponder behind a glass surface with AN WARNII heat reflecting film may affect its function and Check that none of the rear seat passengers performance is in danger of becoming trapped in any way For the optimal function of electronic equip n closing the windows from the driver s ment it should be positioned on the part of the i vi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 101 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Windows rearview and door mirrors Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of bec
269. ight 287 SR control Distance E 167 179 hand side Warning Distance Alert E Low battery 221 Start Stop Adap 131 162 tive cruise control P Parking brake 139 gt gt Ww Option accessory for more information see Introduction 405 01 10 OO 111 10 406 10 Specifications Symbols in the display Symbol U Information symbols in the roof console display X Driver Alert System 183 EE Seatbelt reminder 18 Airbag passenger 22 23 e seat activated Driver Alert Sys 183 186 e tem Lane Depar gd ture Warning Hd Airbag passenger 23 seat deactivated Driver Alert Sys 186 tem Lane Depar ture Warning Driver Alert Sys 183 tem Time for a break n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 10 Specifications AN 62 11 Alphabetical Index A ACC Adaptive cruise control 154 Active Bending Lights ABL 90 Active chassis FOUR C 226 Active Xenon headlamps 90 ACAD atl OM ss 119 Adapting driving characteristics 226 Adaptive cruise control 154 PORT NM 162 cs A 160 Additional heater Diesel 223 Adjusting headlamp pattern 94 halogen headlamp 95 Adjusting the steering wheel
270. ild s weight Weight 22 36 kg 15 25 kg i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion Press the booster cushion backwards to lock 01 Safety Start from the lower stage Press the but ton 8 Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock Volvo recommends that repair or replace ment is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Do not make any modifi cations or additions to the booster cushion If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load such as in con junction with a collision the entire booster cushion must be replaced Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged it may not afford the same level of protec tion The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn It is not possible to adjust the booster cush ion from stage 2 to stage 1 It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion Refer to the heading below Low ering the two stage booster cushion Lowering the two stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the cushion However it is not possible to adjust Child safety 01 the booster cushion from the upper stage to the lower stage Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion S 01 Safe
271. ilure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety M performance the following also applies e Before replacing a windscreen contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted Using the wrong windscreen may result in the City Safety function failing to operate or operating incor rectly e The same type or Volvo approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement 04 Driver support y City Safety Laser sensor For more information on the laser sensor see The City Safety function includes a sensor page 9 which transmits laser light Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser Symbols and messages in the display sensor needs servicing an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety system one or more symbols may illuminate on the instrument panel and a WARNING message may appear on its display Never look into the laser sensor which A text message can be acknowledged by emits spreading invisible laser radiation at briefly pressing the OK button on the direction a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni 04 fying optics such as a magnifying glass microscope lens or similar optical instru ments this would involve a risk of eye injury the illustration on page 168 shows sensor location indi
272. im dimensions In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident Specifications The car has whole vehicle approval This means that certain combinations of wheels and tyres are approved For the permissible com binations see page 388 Wheel rim dimensions Wheels rims have a designation of dimen sions for example 7Jx16x50 i Rim width in inches J Rim flange profile 312 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 16 Rim diameter in mum permitted index is specified in the table V 240 km h inches see page 388 W 270 km h 50 Off set in mm dis Speed ratings tance from wheel Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum Y 300 km h centre to wheel con speed a speed rating Speed Symbol SS tact surface against Tyre speed class must at least correspond with WARNING the hub the car s top speed Minimum permitted speed The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index LI and The only exception to these conditions is win speed rating SS than specified If a tyre ter tyres both those with metal studs and those with too low a load index or speed rating is without where a lower speed rating may be Hee nas ovana used If such a tyre is chosen the car must not 215 Tyre width mm be driven faster than the speed rating of
273. ime The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Side mirror settings gt Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 203 Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto matically retracted extended The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Side mirror settings Fold mirrors For a description of the menu system see page 203 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 81 Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting extending to work correctly 1 Retract the mirrors with the L and R but tons 2 Fold them out again with the L and R but tons 3 Repeat the above procedure as necessary The mirrors are now reset in neutral position Retractable power door mirrors The mirrors can be retracted for parking driving in narrow spaces 1 Depress the L and R buttons simultane ously key position must be at least I 2 Release them after approximately 1 second The mirrors auto matically stop in the fully retracted posi tion Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously The mirrors automatically stop in the fu
274. in the car For information on how this works see page 79 1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START STOP ENGINE button to start the car The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting This is so that the emissions system can reach normal operating tem perature as quickly as possible which min imises exhaust emissions and protects the environment Keyless drive Follow steps 2 3 for starting petrol and diesel engines For more information on Keyless drive see page 53 A prerequisite for the car to start is that one of the car s remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing Stop the engine To switch off the engine e Press START STOP ENGINE the engine stops i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 113 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Starting the engine If the gear selector is not in P position or if the car is moving e Press twice on START STOP ENGINE or hold the button depressed until the engine stops Steering lock A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks e The steering lock unlocks when the remote control key is in the ignition switch and the START STOP ENGINE button is depressed e The steering lock locks
275. ind screen in front of the camera sensor as this could reduce or prevent the function of one or more camera dependent systems The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye i e they see worse in dark ness heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example Under such conditions the functions of camera dependent systems could be sig nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged Strong oncoming light reflections in the car riageway snow or ice on the road surface dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor func tion when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim ited which is why pedestrians and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations or they are detected later than anticipated During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians vehicles or road markings in front of the car At the same time this means that besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake the Auto matic main dipped beam dimming Road sign informati
276. ing brake Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start see page 120 D IMPORTANT The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow start the engine Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right hand side of the bumper front or rear Attaching the towing eye N ra e 2 o E Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area The cover for the towing eye s attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways e Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess turning it outwards Then turn out the cover completely and remove it e The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner Press the mark ing with a finger and fold out the oppo site side corner at the same time using a coin or similar the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange Turn in the towing eye firmly e g using the wheel wrench After use unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper D IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch Call a recovery service for recovery assistance On cer
277. ing environment CD 03 91 CD 03 Your driving environment Lighting HE Ail amm Button for hazard warning flashers Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are in use The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km h The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automat ically when the car is driven off again or the button is depressed For more information on Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 135 o e a N E o ivi Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release The direction indicators flash three times The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Triple indicator For a description of the menu system see page 203 Continuous flash sequence gt Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually or automatically by the steering wheel movement Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols see page 72 G021149 NE Controls in roof console for the front
278. ing optimum light com position when conditions are favourable The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require 03 Your driving environment QD Lighting 03 Imm OD 03 Your driving environment 03 90 Lighting D IMPORTANT Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required e n heavy rain or dense fog In snow flurries or slush In moonlight When driving in poorly lit built up areas When the traffic ahead has weak light ing e Ifthere are pedestrians on or beside the road e lfthere are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road e When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e g a crash barrier e When there is traffic on connecting roads On the brow of a hill or in a hollow In sharp bends For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 Tunnel detection In cars with rain sensor the rain sensor detects the changed light conditions when the car is 3 Activated on delivery from the factory e g driven into a tunnel and dipped beam is activated within a second in markets without automatic dipped beam Dipped beam is deac tivated approx 20 seconds after the car has been driven out of the tunnel Note The head lamp control must be in position for tun nel detection to work
279. ion accessory for more information see Introduction Introduction 11 Introduction Volvo and the environment the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic queues and tunnels for example The entry of nitrous oxides ground level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter Interior The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea sant and comfortable even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally compatible materials Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment When Volvo s workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte nance of your car it becomes part of our sys tem Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact here are a few tips e Avoid letting the engine idle switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods Pay attention to local regulations e Drive economically think ahead
280. ions are descri bed in this manual in the following form Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock Driver door then all The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the steer ing wheel keypad 1 Press the centre console button MY CAR 2 Scroll to the desired menu e g Settings with the thumbwheel 1 and then press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 3 Scroll to the desired menu e g Car settings and press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 4 Scroll to Lock settings and press the thumbwheel a new submenu opens 5 Scroll to Doors unlock and press the thumbwheel a submenu of selectable functions opens 6 Choose between the options All doors and Driver door then all and press the thumbwheel a cross is marked in the option s empty box 7 Exitthe programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT 2 or with one long press The procedure is the same as with the centre console s buttons see page 202 OK MENU 2 EXIT 4 and the TUNE knob 3 MY CAR The following options are available in menu source MY CAR 05 e My V60 e DRIVe e Support systems e Settings gt gt Ww Option accessory for more information see Introduction 203 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 204 Menu source MY CAR My V60 DSTC 2 City Safety 3 Driver Alert 4 Collision Warning 5 Reduced G
281. iplash protection WHIPS In the event of a frontal collision and or side impact collision and or rear end collision and or overturning In a frontal collision and or side impact accident and or overturning In a frontal collision In a side impact accident In the event of a side impact and or over turning and or some frontal collisions In a rear end colli sion The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a col lision without airbag deployment A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit the speed of the car the angle of the collision etc affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated If the airbags have deployed the following is recommended e Recovering the car Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop Do not drive with deployed airbags e Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car s safety systems e Always contact a doctor OA The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision The airbag control module is located in the centre console If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid discon nect the battery cables Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy Recovering the car Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop Never drive wi
282. is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use The speed applicable on an exit is indicated by means of an additional sign containing an arrow The arrow is dis played under the symbol showing the speed Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator Limited distance or time of day Some speeds are applicable only after a specific distance or at a certain time of day The driver s attention is drawn to the situation by means of an empty frame under the sym bol showing the speed Setting in MY CAR G046 71 Options in MY CAR The instrument panel s speed symbol display can be disabled To deactivate the RSI func tion e Uncheck the option in MY CAR Settings gt Car settings Road Sign Information and go back by pressing EXIT see page 203 Speed warning The driver can opt to receive a warning Speed Alert when the applicable speed limit is excee ded by 5 km h or more This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maxi mum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded To activate speed warning e Check speed warning in MY CAR Settings gt Car settings Speed alert and go back by pressing EXIT see page 203 Limitations The RSI function s camera sensor is limited just like the human eye Find out more about this on page 178 Signs which indirectly provid
283. it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking The DSTC symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA is working n T Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 During your journey 07 303 07 During your journey 07 Towing and recovery Towing Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins 1 Unlock the steering lock by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START STOP ENGINE button key position Il is activated see page 78 for more informa tion on key positions 2 Theremote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed 3 Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking 4 Be prepared to brake to stop e Checkthatthe steering lock is unlocked before towing e The remote control key must be in key position Il in position I all airbags are deactivated e Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal Manual gearbox Prior to towing Move gear lever into neutral and release the pa
284. itting WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack Park the car so that passengers have the car or preferably a crash barrier between them and the road The car s regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time such as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre switching between summer tyres and winter tyres etc Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car If the car is to be jacked up more often or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel use of a garage jack is recommended In this instance follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment 08 Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure G021830 The tyre pressure decal on the driver s side door pillar between frame and rear door shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions This is also specified in the tyre pressure table see page 388 e Tyre pressure for the car s recommended tyre dimension e ECO pressure eant Temperature differences change the tyre pressure 1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy Fuel economy ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km h the general tyre pressure is recommended applies for both full load and light load in order to obtain optimum fuel economy Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pres
285. k If the phone book contains a ringing caller s contact information then this is shown in the TV screen Quick search for contacts In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain a list of contacts Turn TUNE to select and press OK MENU to call Under the name of the contact is the phone number that is selected by default If the sym bol gt appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the contact Press OK MENU to show the num bers Change and dial a number other than that selected by default by turning TUNE Press OK MENU to dial Search in the list of contacts by using the cen tre console s keypad to key in the start of the contact s name see Character table keypad in centre console for button functions The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the centre console s keypad with the letter that the contact searched for starts with For example a long press on the button for 6 gives instant access to that part of the list where the contacts with the letter M are located Character table keypad in centre console key Function Space Q 1 uu ABC AXAC2 2 ABC 3 pp DEFEES a en GHIIA 5 KE 6 mo MNOOONOG gt pors PQRSB7 e Tuy TUV US 9 wxvz HS Shift between upper and lower case letter FAV 06 Infotainment system o 0pw nro Searching for contacts Anders Andersson
286. kets E Only certain markets For filling engine oil see page 329 Coolant Prescribed grade Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50 water see the pack aging Volume litres T5 B4204T7 10 5 D2 D4162TP D2 D41627 wA us B5204T8 8 9 T5 B5204T9 se B5254T12 T6 B6304T4 D4 D5204T3 D4 AWD D5244T17 D3 D5204T7 D5 D5244T15 D5 D5244T11 1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285 1 Volume litres T3 B4164T3 TAC B4164T T4F B4164T20 T3 B4164T3 9 8 TAC B4164TE T4F B4164T2 Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 370 B Only certain markets C DRIVe for certain markets D Manual gearbox E Automatic gearbox 10 Specifications Fluids and lubricants 01 10 00 11 gt gt 10 Specifications Fluids and lubricants Other fluids and lubricants 10 Manual gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid 0110 OO 17 MMT6 BOT 350M3 M66 1 9 Automatic gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid MPS6 7 3 BOT 341 TF 80SC 7 0 AW TF 80SD 7 0 AW Brake fluid Brake system DOT 4 Power steering fluid Power steering WSS M2C204 A2 or equivalent product Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 5 4 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point Cars without headlamp washing 4 0 Fuel Petrol engine approx 67 Petrol see page 288 Diesel engine approx 67
287. key pad For general information on menu naviga tion see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Starting playback of a disc Press the MEDIA button turn TUNE until Disc is shown press OK MENU If there is a disc in the media player then the disc starts playing back automatically otherwise Insert disc is shown in the TV screen Then insert a disc with text side up The disc starts to play back automatically If a disc with audio video files is inserted into the player then the disc s folder structure needs to be loaded Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a certain delay before playback starts Disc eject A disc remains in the ejected position for about 12 seconds after which it is inserted back into the player for safety reasons Pause When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed the media player is paused When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again the media player starts It is also possi ble to pause via the menu system press OK MENU select Play Pause Playback and navigation CD audio discs Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist and navigate in the list Use OK MENU to confirm the selection of the disc track and start play back Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing on cS on the centre console or the steering wheel keyp
288. keypad with a thumbwheel these can be used instead of the controls in the centre console TUNE OK MENU EXIT see page 236 Views in the TV screen For each main source there are four basic types of views e Normal view 2 normal mode for the source e Shortcut menu 3 shows commonly used menu options in the main sources TEL and MEDIA accessed by pressing the active source s main source button 1 8 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV e Quick view 4 fast mode when TUNE is turned e g for changing disc tracks radio station etc e Menu view 5 for menu navigation accessed by pressing OK MENU The views have different appearances depend ing on the source in car equipment settings etc Pop up menu video and TV Press OK MENU when a video file is being played back or TV is being shown in order to access the pop up menu FAV store a preset The FAV button can be used to store functions that are used frequently so that the function can be started simply by pressing FAV You can select a favourite e g Equalizer for each function as follows In RADIO mode e AM e FM1 FM2 e DAB1 DAB2 In MEDIA mode e DISC e USB e iPod e Bluetooth e AUX e V Itis also possible to select and store a favourite for MY CAR CAM and NAV Favourites can also be selected and stored under MY CAR For more information on the menu system MY CAR see page 202 To
289. l oth erwise problems may arise with the batter pp Scroll fast forward change Ie track song DVD Menu MENU EXIT To previous cancels function 2 deletes input characters Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con sole Wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 219 06 Infotainment system 06 280 Remote control S gt OK MENU FAV x INFO d Navigate up down Navigate right left Confirm selection or go to the menu system for the selected source Volume decrease Volume increase Preset channels number and let ter input Shortcuts for favourite setting Information about the current programme song etc Also used when there is more information available than can be shown in the TV screen Selection of language for sound track Subtitles selection of language for text Teletext On Off Replacing the battery in the remote control G043863 Battery life is normally 1 4 years and 1 Push down the catch on the battery cover depends on how much the remote control and slide the battery cover in the direction is used of the infrared lens 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new The remote control is powered by four batter batteries in accordance with the symbols ies of the AA LR6 type in the battery compartment and fit them 3 Refit the cover NOTE Take along extra batteries for a long journey Be sure to dispose of the ex
290. l 3 4 years of age and then front facing booster cushions child seats until up to 10 years of age Child seats seat Sharp edges may damage the straps Look in the installation instructions for the child The position of a child in the car and the choice seat for the correct fitting of equipment are dictated by the child s weight and size for more information see page 32 Location of child seats You may place e a child seat booster cushion on the pas senger seat provided the passenger air bag is not activated Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun try Check what does apply e one or more child seats booster cushions Children of all ages and sizes must always sit DAS SAS enr correctly secured in the car Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger Always fit child seats booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys Volvo has child safety equipment child seats booster cushions amp attachment devices which is designed for your particular car Using Vol When using child safety products it is vo s child safety equipment provides you with important to read the installation instruc optimum conditions for your child to travel tions included safely in the car Furthermore the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
291. l wheels on the car e Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels WARNING When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve Driveable punctured tyres If Self Supporting run flat Tyres SST have been selected then the car is also equipped with TPMS This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side wall that makes continued driving possible to a limited extent despite the tyre losing all or some of its pressure These tyres are fitted on a special rim Normal tyres can also be fitted to this rim If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illumi nates and a message is shown in the text panel If this occurs reduce speed to max 80 km h The tyre must be replaced as soon as possible Drive carefully in some cases it can be difficult to see which tyre is faulty In order to establish which tyre needs attention check all four tyres WARNING SST tyres should only be fitted by individu als with expertise on SST tyres SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown do not drive faster than 80 km h Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking or turning SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam aged or punctured i Option accessory for more i
292. lant The engine must only be run with a well filled cooling system Otherwise tem peratures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage cracks in the cylinder head Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser voir The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir Check the level regularly Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service For capacities and recommended fluid grade see page 381 The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard frequent braking such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity WARNING Ifthe brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid Volvo rec ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment Filling Brake fluid reservoir location The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached 1 Turn and open the cover located on the covering 2 Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks which are located on the inside of the reservoir D IMPORTANT Do not forget to refit
293. libration switch off all elec trical equipment climate control system wipers etc and make sure that all doors are closed 3 Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx 6 seconds using a paper clip for example until the character C is shown Magnetic zones n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx 3 seconds The number of the cur rent magnetic zone is shown Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone 1 15 is shown See the map of magnetic zones for the compass Wait until the display resumes showing the character C Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km h until a compass direc tion is shown in the display indicating that calibration is complete Then drive a further 2 circles to fine tune calibration Repeat the above procedure as necessary Power sunroof General The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally Key position I or Il is required for the sunroof to be opened Horizontal opening Horizontal opening backward forward E Opening automatic p Opening manual E Closing manual E Closing automatic Opening For maximum sunroof opening move the con trol back to the position for automatic opening and release Open manua
294. lly by pulling the control back wards to the point of resistance for manual opening The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button is kept depressed Closing Close manually by pushing the control for wards to the point of resistance for manual closing The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed WARNING Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed The sunroof s pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing not manual Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing and then release it The power supply to the sunroof is switched off by selecting key position O and removing the remote control key from the ignition switch If there are children in the car Hemember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by selecting key posi tion O and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car For informa tion on key positions see page 79 Vertical opening Vertical opening raised at the rear edge ke Open by pressing the rear edge of the con trol upward 23 Close by pulling the rear edge of the con trol down n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment QD 03 107 CD 03 Your driving environment Power sunroof 03 108 Closing using the remote control key or central locking button re E A o o
295. lly extended posi tion n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected see page 94 Rear window and door mirror defrosters Use the defroster to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and the door mir rors One press of the button starts the heating The light in the button indicates that the function is active Disconnect the heating as soon as the ice misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily However the heating is switched off automatically after a certain time The door mirrors and rear window are demis ted defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than 9 C Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Automatic rear defroster Select between On or Off For a description of the menu system see page 203 Interior rearview mirror G031427 Control for dimming Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting 1 Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment 2 Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen Automatic dimmin
296. located at the front of the engine compartment behind the radiator may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off Always have the engine cleaned by a work shop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot Raising the car Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question If a jack is selected other than the one recom mended by Volvo follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment If the car is raised with a workshop jack posi tion the jack against the front edge on the engine s subframe Do not damage the splashguard under the engine Ensure that the workshop jack is posi tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack Always use axle stands or similar If you raise the car using a two pillar workshop lift ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points See preceding illustration G043407 The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left hand side 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 09 Engine compartment overview Filling washer fluid LM D Air filter WARNING The ignition system has very high voltage and output The voltage in the ignition sys tem is highly dangerous The remote control key must always be in 0 position when work is being done in the engine compartment co o x e t 2 o Turn the handle about 20 25 degrees see page 78 clockwise You will hear when
297. lose to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly The catalytic converters consist of a monolith ceramic or metal with channels The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum rho dium palladium These metals act as catalysts i e they participate in and accelerate a chem ical reaction without being used up them selves Lambda sond oxygen sensor The Lambda sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine This value is fed into an electronic system that con tinuously controls the injectors The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion and together with the three way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions hydrocarbons car bon monoxide and nitrous oxides Petrol Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used e 95 RON can be used for normal driving e 98 RON is recommended for optimum per formance and minimum fuel consumption When driving in temperatures above 38 C fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy 07 During your journey Ss D IMPORTANT e Always refuel with unleaded pet
298. ly used channel is shown Changing channel It is possible to change channel as follows e Turn TUNE a list of all available channels in the area is shown If any of these chan nels is already saved as a preset then its preset number is shown to the right of the channel name Continue turning TUNE to reach the desired channel and press OK MENU e By pressing the preset buttons 0 9 e Via a short press on the buttons the next available channel in the area is shown If the car has been moved within the coun try for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out anew search and save a new preset list see the function Save the available TV channels as presets page 277 If no reception is available on the preset buttons it may be because the car is at a location other than where the scan of TV channels was run for example if the car was driven from Germany to France A new selection of country and a new search may then need to be carried out Searching TV channels Preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Select country and press OK MENU gt If one or more countries have previously been selected then they are shown in a list 4 Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries Press
299. ly with the sponge on the stains Allow the sponge to absorb the stain Do not rub 4 Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1 Poura small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather 2 Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use The leather has now been given improved pro tection against stains and improved UV pro tection Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel e Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre mois tened sponge and neutral soap e Leather needs to breathe Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas tic e Use natural oils Volvo s leather care agents are recommended for best results If the steering wheel has stains Group 1 ink wine coffee milk sweat and blood Use a soft cloth or sponge Mix a 5 ammonia solution For blood stains use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt Group 2 fats oils sauces and chocolate 1 Same procedure as group 1 2 Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth Group 3 dry dirt dust 1 Usea soft brush to remove the dirt 2 Same procedure as group 1 Treating stains on interior plastic metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth lightly moistened with water available from Volvo dealers is recommended for cleaning interior
300. m consists of radio media player TV and the facility to communi cate with mobile phone Information is pre sented on a 5 or 7 inch colour screen in the upper section of the centre console Functions can be controlled via buttons in the steering wheel in the centre console under the colour screen or via a remote control A mobile phone can also be controlled with voice recognition in certain cases If the Infotainment System is active when the engine is switched off then it is automatically activated the next time the key is inserted into key position I or higher and it continues with the same source e g radio as before the engine was switched off the driver s door must be closed on cars with Keyless systems The infotainment system can be used for 15 minutes at a time without the remote control key being in the ignition switch by pressing the On Off button When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and contin ues when the engine has started 1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the infotainment system is used when the engine is switched off This is to avoid discharging the battery unnec essarily Dolby Pro Logic I DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC II G044178 Made under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories n 5 Op
301. m for this position can be deactivated by a workshop Volvo recom mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop In position dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position Il is active Main beam Main beam can be activated when the head lamp control is in position O or zD Activate deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and release Alternatively the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel When main beam has been activated the sym bol EO illuminates in the combined instru ment panel 2 Applies to certain markets for headlamp control without AUTO mode i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Main beam with automatic activation AHB Main beam with automatic activation Active High Beam AHB is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the wind screen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front and then switches from main beam to dipped beam The lights are switched back to main beam a second or so after the camera sensor no longer detects any such light In cars with this function the headlamp control has another design see page 87 This function can be activated when the head lamp control is in position Em For activation to take place the engine must have been run
302. mage by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM e fthecarhas more cameras installed then the camera in use is changed by turning TUNE Limitations A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera s view Pay attention to the possibility that even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car To bear in mind e Keep the camera lens free from dirt ice and snow e Clean the camera lens regularly with luke warm water and car shampoo take care not to scratch the lens a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support ay Park assist camera 04 193 y 04 Driver support 04 194 BLIS Blind Spot Information System General information on BLIS Rearview mirror with BLIS function ap BLIS camera Q Indicator lamp BLIS symbol BLIS is an information system based on cam era technology that under certain conditions can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in the same direction as the host vehicle in the so called blind spot WARNING The system is a supplement to not a replacement for a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors It can never replace the driver s attention and responsibility The responsibility for changing lanes
303. matically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal manual gearbox or takes his her foot off the brake pedal automatic gearbox Misting forms on the windows M A The environment in the passen M A ger compartment deviates from the preset values The outside temperature falls M A below freezing point or exceeds approx 30 C T Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 gt gt 129 D 03 Your driving environment DRIVe Start Stop 03 130 There is a temporarily high cur rent take off or battery capacity drops below the lowest permissi ble level Repeated pumping of the brake pedal The car starts to roll faster than the equivalent normal walking pace The driver s belt lock is opened with the gear selector in D or N position Steering wheel movements The gear selector is moved from the D position to or R The driver s door is opened with the gear selector in D position a ping sound and text message inform that the Start Stop func tion is active A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically the engine may suddenly start automatically First switch off the engine as normal using the START STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet The engine does not auto start In the following cases the engine does not auto start after having auto stopped ig Option
304. ment under the cargo area floor hatch db wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 295 07 296 07 During your journey Cargo area Loads in the cargo area must be firmly secured even if the safety net is correctly fitted Safety net combined with cargo cover y Puller straps for raising the net The safety net can also be raised from the rear seat when the cargo cover is extended Follow the procedure in the section entitled Using the safety net The straps for raising are located by the arrows 1 Installation instructions no 30756681 A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger com partment in the event of sudden braking Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back up The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted Fitting removal The safety grille is normally permanently instal led in the car because it can easily be folded n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer cargo area is required However if desired the safety grille can be dismantled and removed from the car For information about the tools required and methods for fitting removal see the installation instructions that were included with the initial purchase For safety reasons the safety grille must always be correctly f
305. menu system see page 202 2 Uncheckthe box and back out of the menu system with EXIT The system then allows a more sporty driving style The Sport mode is active until the driver dese lects it or until the engine is switched off after the engine is started the next time the DSTC system is back in its normal mode again 04 Driver support y DSTC Stability and traction control system Symbols and messages in the display DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC Service required Message o 2 o Constant glow for 2 seconds Flashing light DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature The function is reac tivated automatically when the brakes have cooled DSTC system disengaged e Stop the car in a safe place switch off the engine and start it again e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended There is a message on the speedometer s display Read it 04 System check when the engine is started DSTC system is being activated Sport mode is activated Y 04 Driver support 04 148 Road sign information RSI iD 10 EU o o o Examples of readable speed signs The Road sign information function RSI Road Sign Information helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed through information on among other things the cur rent speed the start end of a motorway or road and
306. minates then the system is not working The car s regular brake system con tinues to work but without the ABS function 1 Stopthe car in a safe place and turn off the engine Restart the engine If the symbol remains illuminated drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is on There is only one fog lamp It is located on the driver s side Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system Stability system Sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal steering wheel move ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skid ding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car Engine preheater diesel This symbol illuminates during engine preheat ing Preheating takes place mostly due to low temperature Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low refuel as soon as possible Information read display text When one of the car s systems does not behave as intended this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa tion display The mes
307. mpt e Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button If the engine still does not start The outside temperature is lower than 5 C 1 Connect the engine block heater for at least 1 hour 2 Make further attempts to start with the START STOP ENGINE button D IMPORTANT If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts you are recommended to contact an authorised Volvo workshop Engine block heater G045199 Electrical input to the engine block heater When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with bioethanol E85 an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine The lower the temperature the longer the time required with the engine block heater At 20 C the heater should be used for approx 3 hours Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater Starting and driving with a pre heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption For this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months The engine block heater is powered by high voltage Fault tracing and repair of an elec tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel e Inthe event of stalling due to a
308. n aid It does not relieve the driver of responsi bility when reversing e The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car Function and operation jo LO o it ei o The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly this is normal Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the cam era image is displayed on the screen When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate where the car s rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle this facilitates tight parking reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer The car s approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines These help lines can be switched off in the settings menu If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors then their information is dis played graphically as coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles see page 188 The camera is active approx 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car s speed exceeds 10 km
309. n empty fuel tank bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol For more information on Flexifuel s bioethanol E 85 fuel see page 289 and 384 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Starting the engine Flexifuel Fuel adaptation Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85 Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels is possible If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car 99 has been driven on bioethanol E85 or vice versa then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time For this reason it is impor tant to allow the engine to accustom itself adapt to the new fuel mixture Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed D IMPORTANT After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes If the battery has been discharged or discon nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared CD 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine external battery If the battery is flat then the car can be starte
310. n front of behind or under the seat during adjustment Ensure that none of the backseat passengers will be trapped Heated seats For heated seats see page 215 Head restraint centre seat rear Adjust the head restraint according to passen ger height so that the whole of the back of the 4 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat s memory function CO head is covered if possible Slide it up as required To lower the head restraint again the button located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint see illustration must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down carefully Manual lowering of the outer head restraints rear seat Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward The head restraint is moved back manually until a click can be heard The head restraints must be in locked posi tion after being raised Lowering the rear seat backrest There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down The seat belts must not be connected either Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery The triple section backrest can be folded in different ways The front seats may need to be pushed for wards and or the backrests adjusted upwards in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully e The left hand section can be folded sepa
311. n indicators flashes faster than normal and the display shows the text Bulb fail Ind signal trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail Stop lamp trailer text is shown Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car s load up to the maximum permissible weight When the car is e Option accessory for more information see Introduction stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly which is normal Trailer weights For information on Volvo s permitted trailer weights see page 374 The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights Otherwise the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking Manual gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating e Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm diesel engines 3500 rpm otherwise the oil temperature may become too high Diesel engine 5 cyl e n the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300 3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant Automatic gearbox Ov
312. n vary in the range 1 5 where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability A high number of bars indicates stable driving wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 183 ay 04 Driver support Driver Alert System DAC Driver Alert Time for a break Windscreen Sensors blocked 04 Driver Alert Sys Service required The vehicle has been driven inconsistently the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal text The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Head about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 178 The system is disengaged e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 184 Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on LDW The LDW Lane Departure Warning function is intended to reduce the risk of so called single vehicle accidents accidents where in certain situations the vehicle leaves the carriageway and is in danger of driving either into a ditch or into oncoming traffic LDW consists of a camera that detects the side markings painted on the carriageway The driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the vehicle crosses a side marking Operation and function The function is switched on or off by means
313. n when Distance Warning is activated see page 165 Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated this may be because the time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a given time interval Temporary deactivation standby mode To temporarily disengage Cruise control and set it in standby mode e Press the steering wheel button Q gt Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis play e g 100 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 157 ty 04 Driver support 04 158 Adaptive cruise control Keypad without Speed limiter To temporarily disengage Cruise control and set it in standby mode e Press the steering wheel button P Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e the foot brake is used e the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute e the gear selector is moved to N position automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed A temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to t
314. na System nn ECT S 631D 0806 R m country EU China Continental Complies with IDA cc Standards DB01752 TA 2006 499 O Made in Cz FCC ID KRSSWK49264 Brazil 1C 267T SWK49264 CCABOGLP1940T4 CETSI777C 0306IR G046201 TIRC LIPD 2006 22 E ob NA TEI CMI 1D 2006DJ1124 TT C y i 2008810 3 Hong Kong AA mane Bo ET Keyless lock system Keyless drive a Country 8 EU Continental SWK4 9265 Radar system C 5 Singapore Complies with IDA standards Korea DA105753 Continental SIE 5WK 49268 a IDA Infocomm Development IG Authority of Singapore G046200 Brazil QUANATEL 392 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 10 00 11 10 Specifications Type approval Bluetooth Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity 10 Countries in the EU 2 Exporting country Japan Manufacturer Alpine Electronics Inc Type of equipment Bluetooth device For further information visit http ec europa eu enterprise rtte faq htm informing gt gt 10 Specifications Type approval iom ALPINE ELECTRONICS INC ALPINE 20 1 Yoshima Kogyodanchi IwakFCity Fukushima 970 1192 Japan Phone 81 246 36 4111 Fax 81 246 36 6090 JQ P RPM DECLARATION of CONFORMITY We Alpine Electronics Inc of the above address hereby declare at our sole responsibility that the following
315. nal appear ance Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau tiful patina over time The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac teristics It is given a protective coating but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean ing and treatment of leather upholstery which when used in accordance with the instructions preserves the leather s protective coating After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge depend ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product 09 Maintenance and service Car care 09 363 09 Maintenance and service 09 Car care To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year or more if necessary The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail able from your Volvo dealer D IMPORTANT e Certain items of coloured clothing for example jeans and suede garments may stain the upholstery e Never use strong solvents Such prod ucts may damage fabric vinyl and leather upholstery Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1 Pourthe leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam 2 Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements 3 Dab accurate
316. nary vehicle Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 15 ty 04 Driver support 04 160 Adaptive cruise control WARNING When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed e The driver must intervene him herself and brake Automatic standby mode with change of target Cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode e when the speed is below 5 km h and cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object e g a speed bump e when the speed is below 5 km h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con trol no longer has a vehicle to follow Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In certain situations Queue Assist automati cally interrupts braking when stationary This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself herself in order to maintain its position Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets cruise control in standby mode in the following situations e the driver puts his her foot on the brake pedal e the parking brake is applied the gear selector is moved to P N or R position e thedriver sets the cruise control in
317. nction that detects pedes trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the head arms shoulders legs upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection e In order for a pedestrian to be detected he she must appear full length and have a height of at least 80 cm e The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items e The camera sensor s ability to see pedes trians at dusk and dawn is limited just like the human eye e The camera sensor s capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels even when street lights are lit Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection is an assistance tool This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e g parti ally obscured pedestrians people in cloth ing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm e The driveris always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed Operation Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre console display screen and menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 202 The Brake Support an
318. nformation see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres G043439 Emergency puncture repair TMK Temporary Mobility Kit is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid The kit works as a temporary repair The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira tion date and after use The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc tured in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in P the wall Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits cracks or similar damage Connect the compressor to one of the car s 12 V sockets see pages 229 and 293 Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sock ets in the tunnel console see page 229 no other current consumer must be connected to the other one The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo Location of the emergency puncture repair kit Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area see page 318 Emergency p
319. ng flashers 87 92 200 224 152 154 20 85 AE 202 236 262 238 113 78 202 235 238 58 62 101 103 92 MO CCS 9600 Go eoa Control for infotainment and menu control Control panel for climate control Gear selector Controls for active chas sis Four C Wipers and washing Steering wheel adjust ment Bonnet opener Parking brake Seat adjustment Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate 202 235 238 213 121 226 98 99 85 328 157 81 59 86 287 n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Instruments and controls __ Function Page 03 gt gt 69 CD 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 e x a o o Right hand drive hE 2060 oo off e 800 Display for infotainment and menus Ignition switch START STOP ENGINE button Cruise control Combined instrument panel Horn airbags Menu audio and phone control Wipers and washing Door handle Control panel Headlamp control opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate Seat adjustment LT NEN TEN 202 235 238 18 113 152 154 TA ETE 20 85 202 236 262 238 98 99 56 62 101 103 59 86 267 81 p Q B AS ec G eo Parking brake Steering wheel adjust ment Menus and messages direction in
320. ng in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm s level and movement sensors and the sensors for open ing the tailgate are disconnected The doors remain locked and armed e The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re armed 1 Only in combination with alarm Unlocking the car from inside G046434 E To unlock the tailgate Press the lighting panel button 1 gt The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened within 2 minutes if the car is locked from the inside Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key s button for locking Tall see page 45 gt The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts flashing which means that the car is locked and the alarm has been activated n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Deadlocks Deadlocks means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged which prevents doors being opened from the inside The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state wi
321. ngine Maximum distance for enabling remote star ting of the engine is approx 30 metres in unob structed space in addition the car must be locked To remote start the engine 3 Only on PCC key see page 47 4 Read about the PCC key on page 47 5 Read about Approach lighting on page 46 and 94 1 Briefly press on the remote control key s lock button 1 2 Follow this immediately afterwards with a long press at least 2 seconds on button 2 If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the following takes place 1 Alldirection indicators flash quickly several times 2 he engine starts 3 All direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the engine has started NOTE After remote starting the car continues to be locked but with the alarm deactivated With PCC key The light indication for Approach d lighting flashes several times when the button is pressed and then goes to constant glow if all criteria for ERS have been fulfilled However this does not mean that ERS has started the engine To check whether ERS has started the engine the user can press the Information button 3 if the engine has started there is a light indi cation on the button for Approach lighting 2 Active functions The following functions are activated with a remote started engine e Ventilation system e Audio video system Deactivated functions The following func
322. nition system s replies come via the car s speakers 1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System Language eee Language n Ewenaska Dansk es Witkin E be English Deutsch ha Nederiands baFrancais Selec language Language list Voice recognition is not possible for all lan guages Languages available for voice recog nition are marked with an icon in the language list Ol Changing the language is performed in the menu system MY CAR see page 204 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 271 06 Infotainment system 06 212 Voice recognition mobile phone Remember G043875 Steering wheel keypad 1 Button for voice recognition To activate the system Before voice commands to a mobile phone can be used the mobile phone must be paired and connected via Bluetooth handsfree If a tele phone command is given and no mobile phone is paired then the system will provide informa tion about this For information on pairing and connecting a mobile phone see page 263 e Press the button for voice recognition 1 in order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands The sys tem will then display commonly used com mands in the TV screen in the centre con sole Keep the following things in mind when you use the voice recognition system e Foracommand speak a
323. nly cars with navigation Keypad with thumbwheel e Short presses scroll between disc tracks or preset radio stations A long press fast winds disc tracks or searches for the next available radio station Volume press to raise or lower the audio volume E EXIT short press leads upwards in the menu system interrupts current function interrupts rejects phone calls or erases entered characters Long press leads to normal view or if you are in normal view to the highest menu level see Main source view page 236 e Option accessory for more information see Introduction OK MENU TUNE Press to accept options in menus Leads to the menu view in the selected source e g RADIO or MEDIA Arrow to the right of the screen is shown when there are underlying menus Turn to scroll among disc tracks folders radio and TV stations phone contacts or navigate through options on the TV screen Without voice recognition press to switch off the radio media audio MUTE or restore the audio if it has been switched off With voice recognition Voice recogni tion for Bluetooth connected mobile phone and navigation system Main source view A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel keypad leads to normal view If you are in nor mal view and give a long press on EXIT then it is possible to access the same main source buttons that are in the centre console o NAV Volvo s navigation system RTI is
324. nly use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recommends that oil changes are car ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop 10 Specifications 01 10 OO 11 Engine oil grade Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume incl oil filter 10 litres B6304T4 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 6 8 D4 D5204T3 Viscosity SAE OW 30 approx 5 9 D4 AWD D5244T17 approx 5 9 D3 D5204T7 approx 5 9 D5 D5244T11P approx 5 9 D5 D5244T15 approx 5 9 T5 B4204T7 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 5 4 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 D DANSE When driving under adverse conditions use ACEA A5 B5 SAE OW 30 uc T3 B4164T3 Certified and factory filled oil Oil grade WSS M2C925 A approx 4 1 T4D B4164T options for service approx 4 1 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 T4F B4164T2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 approx 4 1 gt gt 01 10 OO 111 10 Specifications Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume incl oil filter 10 litres T4E T5E B5204T9 Viscosity SAE OW 30 B5204T8 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 5 5 approx 5 5 ie B5254T12 approx 5 5 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 370 B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox D DRIVe for certain mar
325. ns of the adaptive cruise avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehi cles and objects some situations another vehicle is not detected or the detection is made later than expected control The driver must be familiar with this Do not use the adaptive cruise control for 04 information before using the adaptive cruise example in city traffic in dense traffic at control junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot of The driver aways bears responsibilty fore cr Do onte nn ros or maintaining the correct distance and speed p EE e even when the adaptive cruise control is p being used The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi cles in front is reduced significantly WARNING j 7 e if the radar sensor becomes blocked and durs P Vue REN ud uis cannot detect other vehicles e g in heavy iy ceps A eT ONL O rain or slush or if other objects have col the grille lected in front of the radar sensor NOTE Keep the area in front of the radar sensor R clean see Maintenance on page 176 ACC field of vision e if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi cantly different from your own speed E Option accessory for more information see Introduction 161 ty 04 Driver support 04
326. nt is recirculated i e no outside air is taken into the car when this func tion is activated Climate control D IMPORTANT If the air in the car recirculates for too long there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out side temperature This reduces the risk of ice misting and bad air Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Recirculation timer For a description of the menu system see page 203 OA When max defroster is selected recircula tion is always deactivated Air quality system IAQS The air quality system separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 217 C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 218 Climate control settings gt Interior air quality system For a Cars with Eco Start Stop DRIVe description of the menu system see With an auto stopped engine certain equip page 203 ment has its function temporarily reduced e g climate control fan speed For m
327. ntrol system is the first The figure 2 has nothing to do with TIMER 1 or TIMER 2 Sym Display Specification wi bol 2 Fuel heater ON Timer is set for Fuel heater The heater is switched on and running The heater s timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car the engine and passenger com partment are heated at the set time Display Specification bol Heater The heater has stopped been stopped by Batt save the car s electron mode ics in order to facil itate starting the engine Heater Setting the heater unavail is not possible due Low fuel to fuel level being level too low approx 7 litres this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx 50 km driving Park Heater not work heater ing Contact a Service workshop for required repair Volvo rec ommends that you contact an author ised Volvo work shop Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater 221 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 222 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button Direct start and immediate stop 1 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start
328. ocking system fuel filler flap Rear window washer Windscreen washers Unlocking tailgate Folding head restraint Fuel pump Movement detector alarm Climate panel Steering lock Siren alarm Data link con nector OBDII Airbags Collision warning system Accelerator pedal sensor PTC element air preheater Dimming interior rearview mirror Seat heating rear 10 11 15 10 10 20 5 15 10 les COC e z 22 Brake light 5 PE Sunroof 20 2 Immobiliser 5 09 Maintenance and service gt gt Ww Option accessory for more information see Introduction 357 09 Maintenance and service Cargo area Positions Electric parking brake left e Electric parking brake right 30 7 E D Trailer socket 1 40 Rear window defroster 30 o e o Trailer socket 2 15 358 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Location of fuses for the Start Stop function e Fuses A1 and A2 are of the MEGA Fuse type and must only be replaced by a work shop e Fuses 1 11 are ofthe Midi Fuse type and must only be replaced by a workshop e Fuse 12 is of the Mini Fuse type For more information on Start Stop see page 127 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Positions O Main fuse for central electrical unit in the engine compartment 09 Maintenance and servi
329. of a switch on the centre console An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func tion is switched on The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby 65 km h when the function is in standby mode due to speed being below 65 km h The LDW function is activated automatically from standby mode after the camera has scan ned in the carriageway s side markings and speed exceeds 65 km h The trip computer display then shows Lane Depart Warn Available 1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected see page 187 If the camera can no longer detect the carria geway s side markings the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable If speed decreases to below 60 km h then the function resumes standby mode and the dis play shows Lane Depart Warn Standby 65 km h If the vehicle crosses the left or right hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal No warning is given in the following situations e Direction indicators activated e The driver has his her foot on the brake pedal e nthe event of the accelerator pedal being depressed rapidly e Inthe event of rapid steering wheel move ments e Inthe event of a sudden turn so that the car rolls The camera sensor also has certain limitations For more information see page 178 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support ay Driver Al
330. ogramme types e g NEWS or TP are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type If the vol ume level is adjusted during the programme interruption the new level is saved until the next programme interruption Scan wavelength The function automatically searches for avail able channels and takes into account any pro gramme type filtering When a station is found it is played for approx 10 seconds before scanning is resumed When a station is playing back it can be saved as a preset in the usual way see the section Preset page 246 Tostart scanning go in FM AM mode to FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan NOTE Scanning stops if a station is saved Radio system DAB General DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting is a digital broadcasting system for radio This system supports DAB DAB and DMB Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca tions If there is no coverage then the mes sage No reception is shown in the display screen Service and Ensemble e Service Channel radio channel only audio services are supported by the sys tem e Ensemble A collection of radio channels on the same frequency Storing channel groups Ensemble learn When the vehicle is moved to a new broad casting area programming of existing channel groups in the area may be necessary Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups The list is not updated au
331. omatic lighting acti vated e On left hand side pressed in passenger compartment lighting switched on Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if e the caris unlocked with the remote control key or key blade see pages 45 or 48 e the engine has been switched off and the car s electrical system is in key position O Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when e the engine is started e the car is locked The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto matically after two minutes Mood lights When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run ning a number of LEDs illuminate including one in the ceiling lighting in order to provide a low light and enhance the mood while driving This lighting goes out for a little while after the normal passenger compartment lighting when the car is locked 03 Your driving environment CD 03 gt gt a CD 03 Your driving environment Lighting Home safe light duration Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the ca
332. oming trapped in any way when closing the windows in par ticular when the remote control key is used If there are children in the car remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car For information on key positions see page 79 Operating A 4 ra G043527 Operating the power windows E gt Operating without auto p Operating with auto All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver s door the control panels for the other doors can only each oper ate their respective power window Only one control panel can be operated at a time In order for the power windows to be used the key position must be at least see page 78 The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed although not after a door has been opened Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted e g if there is ice forming After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deacti vated for a short while now it is possible to close by continually holding the button pulled up One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when
333. on Driver Alert Control and Lane Departure Warning functions will not have full functionality either The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action 04 Driver support y Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection The windscreen sur Clean the wind The windscreen sur Wait It may take Dirt has appeared face in front of the screen surface in face in front of the several minutes for between the inside camera is dirty or front of the camera camera has been the camera to meas of the windscreen covered with ice or from dirt ice and cleaned but the ure the visibility and the camera Snow Snow message remains Thick fog heavy rain No action At times or snow means that the camera does not the camera does not work during heavy work sufficiently rain or snowfall well Symbols and messages in the display Collis n warning OFF Collision warn Unavaila ble Auto brak ing was activated Symbol Specification Collision warning system switched off Shown when the engine is started The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button The collision warning system cannot be activated Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button Auto Brake has been active The message clears after one press of the OK button
334. on see illustration on page 272 Once a dialogue has been started commonly used commands will be shown in the TV screen Greyed out text or text within brackets is not included in the spoken command When the driver becomes accustomed to the system he she can speed up the command dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys tem by briefly pressing the button for voice recognition Commands can be given in several ways The command Phone call contact can be pronounced as e g e Phone gt Call contact Say Phone wait for the system s reply and then continue by saying Call contact or e Phone call contact Say the whole com mand in one sequence Quick commands Quick commands for the phone can be found in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice command list gt Phone commands and General commands 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone For a description of the menu system see page 202 Dial a number The system understands the numbers 0 zero to 9 nine These numbers can be pronounced individually in groups of several numbers at a time or the whole number all at once Numbers greater than 9 nine cannot be handled by the system e g 10 ten or 11 eleven are not pos sible The following is an example of a dialogue with voice commands The system s reply will vary depending on the situation The user starts the dialogue by saying
335. on in accord ance with the message in the display Clear the message using the OK button Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors the bonnet or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warn ing symbol illuminates together with an explan atory text message in the combined instrument 2 Only cars with alarm panel Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door bonnet or boot lid whichever is open If the caris driven at a speed lower than approx 7 km h then the information symbol illuminates If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx 7 km h then the warning symbol illuminates Trip meter G044561 Trip meter and controls Display for trip meter e Controls for switching between trip meters T1 and T2 as well as resetting the trip meters The meters are used to measure short dis tances The distance is shown in the display One short press on the control switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2 A long press more than 2 seconds resets the cur rently displayed trip meter Clock G044562 Clock and setting knob ap Display for showing the time 2 Controls for setting the clock Turn the knob clockwise anticlockwise to set the clock Turn first to the end position and then turn past over the end position a further approx 1mm a click sounds and is felt in a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03
336. operation Lamp in lock button Central locking is available in two variants the lamp in the central locking button for the driv er s door has different meanings dependent on the variant With central locking button only in the driver s door other doors have no button e lluminated lamp means that all doors are locked With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door e lluminated lamp means that only that par ticular door is locked When all buttons are illuminated all doors are locked n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Locking Press the central locking button all closed doors are locked Press and hold at least 2 seconds to also close all the side windows and the sunroof simultaneously Lock button rear doors Er The button s lamp illuminates when the door is locked The rear door lock buttons only lock their respective rear door To unlock the door e Pull the door handle the door is unlocked and opened Global opening Press and hold the central locking button at least 4 seconds to also open all the win 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking dows simultaneously for example to quickly Locking the glovebox The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock ventilate the passenger compartment during Kb eerie kevbladeimthealevebox lock To open hot weather y 9 02 cylinder 1 Push
337. or pens on the inside of the lid The glovebox can be locked using the key blade see pages 48 and 59 Inlay mats Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats WARNING Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Comfort inside the passenger compartment socket to supply current the remote control key must be in at least key position l see page 78 Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use Optional equipment and accessories e g TV screens music players and mobile phones which are connected to one of the passenger compartment s 12V electrical sockets could be activated by the climate control system even when the remote con 05 trol key has been removed or when the car is locked for example when the parking heater is activated at a preset time iD E N o o 3 044771 E Vanity mirror with lighting The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence y 12 V socket in tunnel console rear seat The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V e g TV screens
338. or blue warning field and message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the warning is ignored may result in damage to property Information e o re e o Oo White ISO symbols and white text image on black message field MATE e h A y RL l Em The labels shown in the owner s manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner s manual EN When there is a series of illustrations for step by step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres ponding illustration There are numbered lists with letters adja cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant hi Arrows appear numbered and unnum bered and are used to illustrate a move ment po Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance If there is no series of illustrations for step by step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers Position lists ap Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com ponents are pointed out The num
339. or lamps flash for approxi mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC This indicates that information from the car has been read If any of the other buttons are pressed Red continuous light the alarm has been during this time then the reading is inter triggered since the car was locked rupted Red light flashing alternately in both indi cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago Ei If none of the indicator lamps illumi Range PCC nates with repeated use of the information Le The PCC s range for locking unlocking and button and in different locations as well as tailgate is about 20 m f th teeth after 7 seconds and after the light has trav CSS ANOU A AE IA elled around on the PCC contact a work functions up to about 100 m shop an authorised Volvo workshop is rec Ifthe car does not verify a button being pressed ommended move closer and try again Indicator lamps display information in accord ance with the following illustration The information button functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown without the light trav elling around on the PCC If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking unlocking that shows correct status G04580
340. or when the engine is started When the engine has started all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym bol which only goes out when the brake is dis engaged If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position Il then all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the car s emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure Indicator symbols ABL fault Emissions system ABS fault Hear fog lamp on Stability system Stability system sport mode SPORT yey 5 Engine preheater diesel Low level in fuel tank Information read display text Een FE E 1 For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text For information on checking the oil level see page 329 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction Specification Main beam On Symbol Left hand direction indicators Right hand direction indicators DRIVe Start Stop the engine zLERT auto stopped see page 127 Tyre pressure system see page 319 ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function Active Bending Lights Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car s emissions system Drive to a workshop for checking Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop ABS fault If this symbol illu
341. ore informa tion see page 127 The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting If the insides of the windows start misting up disengage the air quality sensor and the defroster functions for the windscreen the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Air to windows Some air flows from the air vents The air is not recirculated Air conditioning is always engaged Air to windscreen via defroster vent and side windows Some air flows from the air vents Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents to remove ice and misting quickly to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate not at too low fan speed to enable this to ensure good comfort in warm dry weather to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Air to the floor and win dows Some air flows from the dashboard air vents Air to floor and from dashboard air vents Air to floor Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows Airflow to windows from dashboard air vents and to the floor to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid w
342. ormal Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen Total airing function The function opens closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather see page 58 Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car s passenger compart ment is cleaned with a filter This must be replaced at regular intervals Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals If the car is used in a Climate control severely contaminated environment it may be necessary to replace the filter more often There are different types of passenger com partment filter Make sure that the correct filter is fitted Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub stances For more information on CZIP see the brochure included with the purchase of the car The following is included e An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air The function starts when required and is dis engaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old e The air q
343. osition of the volume control radio reception and vehicle speed The controls explained in these operating instructions e g Bass Treble and Equalizer are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste 12Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 13The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources 14Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia 15Does not apply to Performance 06 Infotainment system Menu overview Menus RADIO Main menu AM AM menu Show presets 2 Scan Audio settings Sound stage Equalizer Volume compensation Reset all audio settings Main menu FM1 FM2 FM menu TP Show radio text Show presets Scan News settings 06 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment Advanced settings Show PTY text Main menu DVD Video REG Reset all DAB settings DVD Video Menu Alternative frequency Audio settings DVD disc menu EON Play Pause Continue Set TP favourite MERE MES Stop PTY settings Main menu CD Audio Subtitles Disc menu Reset all FM settings Audio tracks Audio settings pene Advanced settings Scan Angle Main menu DAB1 DAB2 Audio settings DivX VOD code DAB menu Ensemble learn Main menu CD DVD Data Audio settings IN Disc menu PTY filtering En Main menu iPod Turn off PTY filtering y iPod menu to 06 Show radio text Random Random Show pre
344. out and then pulling straight out bulb 4 Unplug the connector from the bulb 4 Unplug the connector from the bulb 4 Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to Replace the bulb and align it in the socket 5 Replace the bulb and align it in the socket etant and turn clockwise in order to secure it It and turn clockwise in order to secure it It Reinstall the parts in reverse order can be secured in one position can only be secured in one position Reinstall the parts in reverse order Reinstall the parts in reverse order wi Option accessory for more information see Introduction 337 09 Maintenance and service The reversing fog and direction indicator bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area ls 2 Open the panel Remove the insulation that is fitted in front of the bulb holder by pulling it straight out Press down the catch and pull out the bulb holder Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise Fit a new bulb press down and turn clock wise Press down the catch when the bulb holder is refitted If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop o e o o Lamp lens right hand side Brake light LED yy Direction indicators e Reversing lamp Rear fog lamp driver s side Remove the screws with a screwdriver Carefully detach the
345. over the spare wheel and through the upper handle Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the long one Attach the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten a out the spare wheel Loosen the straps lift out the spare wheel from the cargo area and remove it from the spare wheel bag Fold up the cargo area floor Lift the tools and jack out from the foam block Changing wheels Removing Set up the warning triangle see page 318 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location The car and jack must be on a firm horizontal sur face 1 Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox Check that the jack is not damaged that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question which is indicated on the jack s label The label also indicates the jack s maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height 2 Take out the jack wheel wrench and removal tool for wheel covers located under the cargo floor in the cargo area If another jack is selected see page 328 3 Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example 4 Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full wheel wheel covers Alter natively the wheel co
346. overed by the seatbelt reminder system 6 EESEES Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions e Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use or if one of the rear doors has been opened The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press ing the indicator stalk s OK button e Provides a warning if one of the rear seat belts is unfastened during travel This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio visual signal The warning stops when the seatbelt is re fastened or it can also be acknowledged manually by press ing the OK button The message on the information display show ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail able Press the OK button to see stored mes sages Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one At low speed the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten sioners A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi ciently violent collision The seatbelt then pro vides more effective restraint for the occu pants WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger s s
347. owed but a vehicle recovery serv ice used instead Even if the car appears to be driveable hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position Do not move the car further than necessary Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed Never under any circumstances attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis played Leave the car at once If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed It must be transported from its loca tion Volvo recommends that it is transpor ted to an authorised Volvo workshop 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Children should sit comfortably and safel y In the event of questions when fitting child Do not secure the straps of the child seat to Volvo recommends that children travel in rear safety products contact the manufacturer the seat s horizontal adjustment bar facing child seats until as late an age as pos for clearer instructions springs or the rails and beams under the sible at least unti
348. ows some examples More information and settings Auto Start Stop ON Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start Stop has been M A activated Auto Start Stop OFF Illuminates for about 5 seconds after Start Stop has been M A switched off Auto Start Stop serv required Start Stop is not operational Contact a workshop an M A authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 131 CD 03 Your driving environment DRIVe Start Stop Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out M A Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically waiting for the M STOP brake or clutch pedal to be depressed DRIVO Press Start button The engine will not start automatically start the engine as M normal with the START STOP ENGINE button Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the clutch pedal M to be depressed Depress the foot brake to start The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake pedal M to be depressed 44114 Press brake and clutch to start The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake or M clutch pedal to be depressed 79 Put gear in neutral Gear is engaged without declutching disengage and set the M gear lever in neutral position Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically waiting for the A brake pedal to be released
349. p D4162T Lambda sonds 4 cyl petrol 10 Lambda sond diesel Control module radiator roller cover manual 5 cyl 2 0 diesel EVAP valve 5 6 cyl petrol 16 Lambda sonds 5 6 cyl petrol gt gt iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 353 09 Maintenance and service f Coolant pump 1 61 petrol Start 10 Stop 5 cyl petrol Start Stop Crankcase ventilation heater 5 cyl Petrol Oil pump automatic gearbox 5 cyl petrol Start Stop Diesel filter heater 20 Control module radiator roller 5 cover 5 cyl petrol Crankcase ventilation heater 5 10 cyl diesel Oil pump automatic gearbox 5 cyl diesel Start Stop Glow plugs diesel 70 43 Cooling fan 4 cyl 5 cyl petrol 60 Cooling fan 6 cyl 5 cyl diesel 80 Electro hydraulic power steer 100 ing A For cars with the Start Stop function this fuse location is empty see instead page 359 09 Maintenance and service 09 Under the glovebox FA Do O mg ILE D Lr 2 10 Ko 1g 55 1 3 D 3c Qi i 11 231128 H 0 EE B x d mire Q 3 QU B alid Y LO I LLL Qu 116 E O DIT bon COCOON CCE On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses in fuse box A o 10 Control panel rear passen 20 ger door right Box A Function ES D Control panel rear passen 20 Primary fuse for audio con 40 9 Door handle Keyless 5 ger door
350. paces C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Comfort inside the passenger compartment Tunnel console Gp Storage compartment in door panel amp Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions Ticket clip Glovebox Storage compartment 9 Jacket holder Q Storage compartment cup holder G043878 Cup holder in armrest rear seat Storage pocket Storage compartment e g for CDs and USB AUX input under the armrest e Includes cup holder for driver and passen ger If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket for the front seat see page 229 and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder 05 Jacket holder The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cameras remote controls for accessories etc in the glove compartment or other com partments Otherwise they may injure peo ple in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision Cigarette lighter and ashtray The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up Activate the lighter by pushing in the button The button pops out when the lighter is hot Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils 228 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Glovebox o co e o o The owner s manual and maps can be kept here for example There are also holders f
351. phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment system The infotainment system then works handsfree with the option to control a range of the mobile phone s functions remotely The microphone used is located by the driver s sun visor 2 The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function Volvo recommends that you seek assis tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones Menus The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen tre console and the steering wheel keypad For general information on menu navigation see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Overview System overview Mobile phone Microphone Steering wheel keypad Centre console control panel 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Phone functions controls overview Centre console control panel Number and letter buttons 2 TEL button activates searches last con nected phone If a phone is already con nected and TEL is pressed a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for the phone TUNE Turn in normal view to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call regi
352. ple or animals near the car G043753 The system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch s On Off lamp is illuminated If parking assistance is switched off with the button the lamp goes out n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction G044040 a Display screen view showing an obstacle left front and right rear The centre console s display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle Marked sectors show which of the four sen sor s detected an obstacle The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle in front of or behind the car Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor s field nearest the car is filled in If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both Park assist syst behind and in front of the car then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers D IMPORTANT Certain objects e g chains thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the signal shadow and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone e n which
353. pped beam E Main beam can be activated Headlamp control and stalk switch E E Headlamp control and stalk switch iti i scd E san Position for main beam flash ED Position for main beam flash this position ED p Position for main beam A meee p Position for main beam nenes Specification Dipped beam off Main beam flash operates in this position D 02 Position parking lamps gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 87 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 88 Lighting Position Specification Dipped beam Dipped beam off in good light conditions The Tunnel detection function activates dipped beam in poor light conditions The function for Main beam with automatic activation can be used Main beam flash operates in this position D Dipped beam Main beam can be activated Main beam flash operates in this position A Applies to certain markets Volvo recommends that mode is used as long as the traffic situation or weather con ditions are not unfavourable for the function for Main beam with automatic activation Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer ing wheel to the position for main beam flash Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released Dipped beam When the engine is started dipped beam is activated automatically if the headlamp con trol is in position O If necessary auto matic dipped bea
354. pply the parking brake when park ing on a slope leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation ki Gearboxes lO00km to empty tank gt R tac An essential detail in connection with environ mental driving is to drive in the right gear and change gear in time The driver is assisted by an indicator GSI Gear Shift Indicator which notifies the driver when it is most advantageous to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption However taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration free running it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed Indication is made with an up or down arrow in the combined instrument panel s right hand display 03 Your driving environment QD 03 121 OD 03 Your driving environment 03 122 NOTE Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel e Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position N before moving it to R position e Only engage reverse gear when the car is stationary With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6 speed gearbox see previous illustra tion first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear Automatic gearbox Geartronic
355. product conforms to the Essential Requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC in accordance with the tests conducted to the appropriate requirements of the relevant standards as listed herewith Product Bluetooth Module Model Type Number IAM 2 1 BT PWB EU Directive and Standards used Bagdig EN 300 328 V1 7 1 2006 10 EMG EN 301 489 17 V1 3 2 2008 04 EN 301 489 1 V1 8 1 2008 04 1807637 2 2004 Safety IEC 60065 Ed 7 2001 Amd 1 2005 EN 60065 2002 Amd 1 2006 Ycar of affixing CE marking P i Signature lS EL Name Shinichi Asuke Date November 12 2009 CE Czech Alpine Electronics Inc t mto prohla uje Ze tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi Republic ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Denmark Undertegnede Alpine Electronics Inc erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Germany Hiermit erkl rt Alpine Electronics Inc dass sich das Ger t Bluetooth Module in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet 394 10 Specifications Type approval county OOOO Estonia K esolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics Inc seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud ll direktiivist tulen
356. prox 6 seconds see page 19 Following which the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag For more information about the different key positions for the remote control key see page 78 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 23 S 01 Safety 01 Side airbags SIPS bags o e o o In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS Side Impact Protection System to beams pil lars the floor the roof and other structural parts of the body The side airbags at the driv er s and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS The SIPS bag system consists of two main components side airbag and sensors The side airbags are located in the front seat back rests e Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Defective work in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury e Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel since this area is required by the side airbag e Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags e The side airbag is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Child seats and side airbags The
357. ptions OK MENU Press to accept options in menus Leads to menu view in selected source e g RADIO or MEDIA Arrow to the right of the screen is shown when there are underlying menus 9 TUNE turn to scroll among disc tracks folders radio and TV stations phone con tacts or navigate through options on the TV screen n i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 gt gt 230 06 Infotainment system 06 236 General information on infotainment Q EXIT short press leads upwards in the menu system interrupts current function inter rupts rejects phone calls or erases entered characters Long press leads to normal view or if you are in normal view to the highest menu level see Main source view page 236 Q INFO If more information than can be shown on the screen is available press the INFO button to see the remaining information 9 Preset buttons input of numbers and let ters 10 FAV shortcut to a favourite setting The button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM FM etc For more infor mation see page 239 Steering wheel keypad The steering wheel keypad can be used as an alternative to the buttons in the centre console The keypad is available in three different ver sions depending on the options and the equip ment level of the car 4 Does not apply to DAB 5 Applies to cars without navigation 6 O
358. r D IMPORTANT Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump reser voir and hoses For capacities see page 381 09 Maintenance and service 09 Battery Operation The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts discharging driving style driving con ditions climatic conditions etc Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight ened WARNING The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly The life of the battery is affected by several factors including driving conditions and cli mate Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances Extreme cold further limits star ting capacity To maintain the battery in good condition at least 15 minutes of
359. r Corner Traction Control CTC CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend with out wheelspin on the inner wheel e g on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed Trailer Stability Assist TSA The function serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake see page 303 NOTE The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode Operation Selection of level Sport mode The DSTC system is always activated it can not be deactivated However the driver can select the Sport mode which allows for a more active driving experi ence In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than i Option accessory for more information see Introduction in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system intervenes and stabilises the car With Sport mode maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck or when driving on a loose surface e g sand or deep Snow Proceed as follows to select Sport mode 1 Press the centre console button MY CAR and search in the display screen s menu system and locate My V60 DSTC For information on the
360. r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Alpine Electronics Inc hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999 5 EC Alpine Electronics Inc erkl rer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF 10 Specifications AAA A approval EA China e HOMES ETA PEA PA ETUR FRE OEIL ES 1 l ARRERA EARN E D EN DTA FE RIRE HOTTE B FHH 2 4 2 4835 GHz B na LE EIRP R lt 10dBi Hf 100 mW ER lt 20 dBm MAR KAS lt 10dBi IN 20 dBm MHz EIRP D Mm XR 20 ppm BI LAN GEN DR CN VB 2 5 fife at qs LA SD e lt 36 dBm 100 kHz 30 1000 MHz e lt 33 dBm 100 kHz 2 4 2 4835 GHz e lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 3 4 3 53 GHz e lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 5 725 5 85 GHz e lt 30 dBm 1 MHz CHE 1 12 75 GHz 2 ACHE A ECRIRE JE E IAS CLF Re UT RUN AR AMA ELI BRUN Ze ERA CE RK 7 oe SFI A IE WTC Ze Ho e IE IDA IR FRR IA ER T 98 21 FY RE 4 AEA RTCA HL USE TC ENS AI FAR ER RE REY ARR HT RS 5 AEE LAMA TE bb 10 Specifications Type approval 398 Taiwan TET FE IBC A AE FSS BEES T TS E PAR MOAN AE Pet RD E A IN E EI EDEN EA RT VUE RUE REZ A E RER RONA SRE C P TER MU EA EUA MAME RENE PRC ARERR E
361. r has been locked 1 Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch 2 Move the left hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash see page 87 03 3 Get out of the car and lock the door When the function is activated dipped beam parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings gt Home safe light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 203 Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key see page 45 and is used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance When the function is activated with the remote control parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on The length of time for which the approach light ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Approach light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 203 Adjusting headlamp pattern G021151 Headlamp pattern left hand traffic Headlamp pattern right hand traffic The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoi
362. r not the device has been connected previously To connect a device for the first time follow the connection alternatives below There are two possible ways of connecting devices either search for the external device from the car or search for the car from the external device If one option does not work then try with the other Alternative 1 search for the external device via the car s menu system 1 Make the external device searchable visi ble via Bluetooth see the external devi ce s manual or www volvocars com 2 Press TEL gt The car searches for previously con nected devices 3 Activate Bluetooth in the car Press OK MENU select Add phone or Change 06 Infotainment system phone if another phone is already con nected If one or more devices have already been connected then these are also shown Select the device you want to connect and press OK MENU gt The menu option is shown on the TV screen 4 Check that the external device s Bluetooth function is switched on and press OK MENU gt The car searches for external devices in the vicinity The search takes approxi mately 30 seconds The external devi ces detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the TV screen The handsfree function s Bluetooth name is shown in the exter nal device as My Volvo Car Turn TUNE to select one of the external devices shown on the car s TV screen and confirm with OK MENU
363. rately e The centre section can be folded sepa rately e The right hand section can only be folded together with the centre section If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately If the centre backrest is being lowered fold and adjust the centre backrest s head restraint downwards see page 82 The outer head restraints are lowered auto matically when the outer backrests are lowered Pull up the backrest s locking handle EX while folding the backrest for ward at the same time A red indicator on the lock catch BH shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion Raising takes place in reverse order When the backrest has been raised the red indicator should no longer be showing If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising 03 Your driving environment CD 03 I 2 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 84 WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi tion after being raised Electrical lowering of the rear seat s outer head restraints 1 The remote control key must be in position lor Il 2 Press the button to lower the rear outer head restr
364. re played 06 Programme type PTY Various types of radio programmes can be selected using the programme type function There are a number of different programme types which also include different programme categories After selecting a programme type navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu gt PTY filtering Exit this mode as follows Press EXIT gt An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking see below is imple mented Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave length DAB has 2 memories for presets DAB1 and DAB2 Storage of presets is made by means of a long press on the desired preset button for more information see page 246 The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons A preset contains one channel but no sub channels If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the main channel is registered This is because subchannels are temporary At the next attempt to retrieve the preset the channel which contained the sub channel will be played The preset is not dependent on the channel list 5 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB
365. reen with EXIT or by pressing the zm button on the remote control Itis also possible to control the teletext with the coloured buttons on the remote control 06 Infotainment system TV Information about the current programme Press the INFO button in order to display the information about the current programme the next programme and its start time If the INFO button is pressed once more then addi tional information on the current programme can sometimes be displayed such as start and end times and a brief description of the current programme For more information on the INFO button see page 235 To return to the TV picture wait several sec onds or press EXIT Picture settings The settings for brightness and contrast can be adjusted For more information see page 255 The reception is lost If the reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze Shortly after this a message appears informing that the reception has been lost for the current TV channel and a new search for the channel continues When the reception returns the dis play of the TV channel starts immediately It is possible to change channel at any time when the message is shown If the message Reception lost searching is shown then this is because the system has iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 gt gt 2 1 9 06 Infotainment system 06 278 detected
366. ressure sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate s rubber ised pressure plate Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long press on any of the door handles pressure sensitive areas or press the smaller of the tail gate s two rubberised buttons the lock indi cator in the windscreen confirms that locking has been completed by starting to flash see page 45 All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked otherwise the car is not locked On cars with automatic transmission the gear selector must be set in the P position otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed Unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate s rubberised pres sure plate is actuated open the door or tail gate as normal The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand move ment a second attempt may be required or with the glove taken off n n n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction Unlocking with the key blade Hole for key blade to loosen the cover If central locking cannot be activated with the PCC e g if the batteries are discharged then the left hand front door can be opened with the PCC s detachable key blade see page 48 To access the lock cylinder the door handle s plastic cover must
367. rking brake Automatic gearbox Geartronic D IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward e Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km h or further than 80 km Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake Automatic gearbox Powershift The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication If towing still has to take place the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis sion this can be verified by checking the des ignation on the transmission s label under the bonnet see page 370 The designa tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission D IMPORTANT Avoid towing e However the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km h Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for ward e Inthe event of moving a longer distance than 10 km the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road professional recovery is recom mended Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the park
368. rmal for the engine s cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off Open tailgate WARNING Do not drive with the tailgate open Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the bat tery to varying degrees Avoid using the key position Il when the engine is switched off Instead use the mode which uses less power Also be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off Examples of such functions are e ventilation fan e headlamps e windscreen wiper e audio system high volume If the battery voltage is low the information dis play shows the text Low battery Power save mode The energy saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and or audio system In which case charge the battery by star ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary Before a long journey e Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal e Make sure that there are no leaks fuel oil or other fluid e Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths e Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in
369. rol so as not to damage the catalytic converter e Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo Bioethanol E85 Do not modify the fuel system or its compo nents and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol Methanol must not be used A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire injury or engine damage Reserve fuel can Thereserve fuel can should be filled with petrol see the NOTE box page 118 D IMPORTANT Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed Ethanol is sensitive to sparks and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol Diesel Only use diesel fuel from well known produc ers Never use diesel of dubious quality Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand ards Diesel engines are sensitive to contami nants in the fuel such as excessively high vol umes of sulphur particles for example At low temperatures 6 C to 40 C a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel which may lead to ignition problems Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies This fuel is less viscous at low tem peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre cipitate The risk of condensation in th
370. roster windscreen D Recirculation side Rear window and door mirror defrosters 12 AUTO 6 Max defroster see page 104 B AC Air conditioning on off O Fan Electrically heated front seat right hand side O Air distribution ventilation floor i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 05 gt gt 213 C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Electronic Temperature Control ETC o Y o a fo o 05 Q Fan Recirculation e Electrically heated front seat left hand 10 Electrically heated front seat right hand side side AC Air conditioning on off B Temperature control Max defroster O Air distribution ventilation floor O Air distribution air vent instrument panel Air distribution defroster windscreen 8 Hear window and door mirror defrosters see page 104 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Press the button three times for the lowest heat Press the button once for the highest heat level level one orange lamp illuminates in the TV three lamps illuminate Heated seats screen Press the button twice for a lower heat level Front seats Press the button four times to switch off the two lamps illuminate heat no lamps illuminate Press the button three times for the lowest heat LAS level one lamp illuminates The heated seat should not be used by peo heat no lamps illuminate
371. rs etc turn TUNE to one of the options see explana tion in the table below in the list 1 and then press OK MENU When the name has been fully entered select OK in the list on the TV screen 1 and press OK MENU Now continue with the telephone number in the same way as above When the telephone number has been entered press OK MENU and select a telephone num ber type Mobile phone Home Work or General Press OK MENU to confirm When all details have been filled in select Save contact in the menu to save the contact 123 Change between letters and ABC numbers with OK MENU More Change to special characters with OK MENU OK Save and go back to Add con tact with OK MENU alA Change between uppercase and lowercase letters with OK MENU lt gt ie OK MENU the cursor moves to the input field 2 at the top of the TV screen The cursor can now be moved with TUNE to the appropriate place to e g insert new letters or delete with EXIT To be able to insert new letters first go back to the input mode by pressing OK MENU Speed dial numbers Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu Phone book gt Speed dial Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per formed in phone mode using the number keys on the keypad in the centre console by press 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 06 Infotainment system ing a number key and then pressing
372. rs and tailgate must be closed NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car If it is not possible to lock unlock with the remote control key the battery may be dis charged lock or unlock the left hand front door with the detachable key blade see page 48 Hemember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch WARNING Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key it is then not pos sible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls Read more about this in the section Deadlocks later on Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking all are locked again automatically This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally For cars with alarm see page 63 Manual locking In certain situations the car must be lockable manually e g in the event of power failure The left hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key s detachable key blade see page 54 Other doors do not have lock cylinders and instead have lock knobs on each door s end face which must be re turned then they are mechanically locked blocked against opening from the outside
373. ructions in the menu sys tem MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice tutorial For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 202 The instructions are divided into 3 lessons which take around 5 minutes in total to com plete The system starts with the first lesson To skip a lesson and go to the next one press the button for voice recognition and say Next Go back to the previous lesson by say ing Previous Exit the instructions by means of a long press on the button for voice recognition Voice training The system displays up to fifteen phrases for you to say Voice training can be started in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice training Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a description of the menu system see page 202 After voice training has been completed remember to set your user profile under Voice user setting Additional settings in MY CAR e User setting Two user profiles can be set the function is activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice user setting Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 202 e Voice volume Can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice output volume For a description of the menu system see page 202 Using voice commands The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice commands by pressing the button for voice recogniti
374. s News from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for news from the selected station or all stations in the RDS net work Goin FM mode to FM menu News settings gt Set news favourite to change Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select one or more programme types such as pop music and serious classic The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta tion s RDS network to break through 1 Activate in FM mode by first selecting the programme types under FM menu gt Advanced settings PTY settings gt Select PTY Only cars with 7 inch screen 2 hen the PTY function must be activated under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Receive traffic bulletins from other networks An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated Deactivation of the PTY function is performed in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks Selected pro gramme types PTY are not reset Resetting and removing PTY are performed under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Select PTY Clear all PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type 1 In FM mode select one or more PTY under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Select PTY 2 Goto FM menu Advanced
375. s such as glossy trim mouldings When using such a cleaning agent the instruc tions must be followed carefully D IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber When using degreasant on plastic and rub ber only rub with light pressure if it is nec essary Use a soft washing sponge Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome plated aluminium rims Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old However the car can be waxed during this time Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq uid or solid wax Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully Many preparations con tain both polish and wax D IMPORTANT Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used Other treatment such as preserving sealing protection lustre sealing or similar co
376. s OK MENU to activate deactivate the function Disc tracks audio files can be changed by pressing e fA gt gt on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad 5 Does not apply to DVD video discs 6 Only applies to audio video files on burned discs or USB Repeat folder This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again When the last file has been played out playback of the first file starts again 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function Playback of DVD video discs Playback When playing back a DVD video disc a disc menu may appear on the display screen The disc menu gives access to additional functions and settings such as selecting subtitles lan guage and scene selection 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia e Option accessory for more information see Introduction A video film is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 km h Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu G044042 Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu is performed using the number keys in the centre console as illustrated above
377. s and or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces It may have difficultly in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads with a heavy load or with a trailer in which case be extra atten tive and ready to slow down Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support 04 155 ay 04 Driver support Adaptive cruise control 04 156 Steering wheel keypad and display in cars with Speed limiter Cruise control On Off Standby mode ceases and stored speed resumes each extra press gives 1 km h Standby mode Time interval Increase decrease Activate and adjust the speed each press gives 5 km h Selected speed in brackets Standby mode Time interval On during adjustment Time interval On after adjustment Steering wheel pee and display in cars with out Speed limiter Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Cruise control On Off or Standby mode Time interval Increase decrease Activate and adjust the speed Selected speed in brackets Standby mode 3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market 4 The display shows either dash symbol 7 or 8 they are never shown simultaneously 5 The display shows either dash symbol 6 or 7 they are
378. s are not switched on then the system does not detect the vehi cles This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye i e they do not see as well e g in heavy snowfall against strong light or in thick fog i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support y 04 185 ay 04 Driver support 04 196 BLIS Blind Spot Information System Cleaning In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam era lenses must be clean The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched D IMPORTANT The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow If necessary brush snow away from the lenses Messages on the display Blind spot info system ON Blind spot syst Service required Blind spot syst Camera blocked The BLIS system is activated Blind spot syst dis engaged contact a workshop The BLIS camera is blocked by dirt Snow or ice clean the lenses Blind spot syst Reduced function Blind spot info system OFF D IMPORTANT Reduced function in the data transmis sion between the BLIS system s cam era and the car s electrical system The camera resets itself when the da
379. s movement and tilt detectors are re engaged If the locking system shall not be changed Press EXIT and lock the car Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking 02 61 02 Locks and alarm Child safety locks The child safety locks prevent children from Opening a rear door from the inside With child safety locks Not to be mixed up with manual door locks see page 57 The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open To activate deactivate the child safety locks Use the remote control key s detachable key blade to turn the knob see page 48 The door is blocked against opening from the inside The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside Each rear door has two knob controls do not mix up the child safety lock with the mechanical door lock A door s knob control only blocks that particular door not both rear doors simultaneously Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock Control panel driver s door z Option accessory for more information see Introduction The child safety locks can be activated deac tivated in all key positions higher than
380. s tall buildings or the TV transmitter being far away Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located A TV licence is required for this product in some countries Menus The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Overview Centre console contro panel MEDIA button Last active source e g iPod or TV is activated If a source is acti vated and you press MEDIA then a short menu options 2 Station presets numeric input Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn ing TUNE O Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU O EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress O The next available channel is shown by pressing Eel DA If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 219 06 Infotainment system 06 2 6 TV Watch TV Press MEDIA turn TUNE until TV is shown in the TV screen press OK MENU gt A search starts and after a short while the most recent
381. s too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump N e N e I o o The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks Measurement and filling if required 1 Ensure that the car is level After switching off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump Pull up and wipe the dipstick Re insert the dipstick Pull it out and check the level S de xe I9 If the level is close to MIN then O 5 litres should be added If the level is significantly below then an additional amount is required 9o If required check the level again do it after driving a short distance Then repeat steps 1 4 WARNING Never fill above the MAX mark The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire 3 Only applies to 5 cyl diesel Engine with electronic oil level sensor SE vg A de Filler pipe You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display see the illustration below Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick 5 cyl diesel 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment G044521 Message and graph in the display Message Engine oil level The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwhe
382. s triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used To avoid this Close the window sunroof when leaving the car If the car s integrated passenger compartment heater or a porta ble electric heater shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger com partment Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance G043763 Same LED as lock indicator see page 45 A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system s status e LED not lit Alarm not armed e The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed e The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi tion is selected Alarm has been trig gered Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but ton Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm 02 63 02 Locks and alarm 02 64 Alarm Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch Other alarm functions Automatic re arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with
383. s via the menu sys tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under Settings gt Climate settings gt Reset climate settings Air distribution G043530 The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart ment iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 05 211 C9 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 212 Climate control Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode If necessary it can be controlled manually see page 219 Air vents in the dashboard LE EY Open E Closed e Lateral airflow D Vertical airflow Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting in the door pillars Air vents e e iD e o o EY Closed EF Open e Lateral airflow Vertical airflow i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist ing in cold weather Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather NOTE Remember that small children may be sen sitive to air flows and draughts Climate control Electronic climate control ECC G043948 ap Temperature control left hand side O Air distribution air vent instrument panel 10 Temperature control right hand side e Electrically heated front seat left hand G Air distribution def
384. sage text is cleared with the OK button see page 200 or it disappears automatically after a time time depending on which function is indicated The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols When a service message is shown the sym bol and message are cleared using the OK button or disappear automatically after a time Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash Left right hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used DRIVe Start Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto stopped Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure system x Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD Instruments and controls 03 13 OD 03 Your driving environment 03 A EE Instruments and controls Warning symbols Symbol Specification Low oil pressure Parking brake applied Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in brake system Warning A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text see pages 329 and 331 Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine s oil pressure is too low Stop the engine immediately and
385. selection does not affect the stored memories Wavelengths can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB band 6 Not all areas countries use both wavelengths Subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels These are temporary and can contain e g translations of the main pro gramme into other languages If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the V symbol is shown to the left of the chan nel name in the TV screen A subchannel is indicated by the symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the TV screen Press SI to access the subchannels Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other channel without selecting it Display of subchannels can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Advanced settings Sub channels Programme type text Some radio stations broadcast information about programme type and programme cate gory for information on Programme types PTY see page 248 This information is shown on the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings Show PTY text 06 Infotainment system Resetting the DAB settings All DAB settings can be reset to the original factory settings The reset is carried out in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings gt Reset all DAB settings 06 9 06 Infotainment system 06 252 Media
386. sets Scan Scan RADIOS Audio settings Ad does Change subtitles vanced settings T Change audio track Main menu USB DAB linking USB menu Scan DAB band Play Pause Audio settings Sub channels 16For submenus see Main menu AM 12Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 15Does not apply to Performance 242 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Stop Random Repeat folder Select USB device Change subtitles Change audio track Scan Audio settings Main menu Media Bluetooth Bluetooth menu Random Change device Remove Bluetooth device Scan Bluetooth software version in car Audio settings 16For submenus see Main menu AM 15Does not apply to Performance 17Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV Main menu AUX Menus TEL AUX menu AUX input volume Main menu Bluetooth handsfree Phone menu Audio settings All calls Main menu TV Plain TV menu Missed calls Select country Answered calls Reorganise presets Dialled calls Autostore Call duration Scan Phone book Audio settings Search New contact Pop up menu video and TV Press OK MENU when a video file is being played back or TV is being shown in order to Receive vCard access the pop up menu Speed dials Memory status Image settings Clear phone book Source menu 8 Change phone DVD disc menu Remove Bluetooth device DVD disc TOP menut 18What is s
387. sides of the roof and wise the intended protection of the inflat protects the car s occupants sitting in the outer able curtain which is concealed in the head seats A sufficiently violent collision trips the lining may be compromised sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the WARNIN driver and passengers from striking their heads z on the inside of the car during a collision The doa curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt COO The whiplash protection system WHIPS con sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe cially designed head restraints in the front seats The system is actuated by a rear end collision where the angle and speed of the col lision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger This reduces the risk of whiplash injury Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WHIPS system and child seats booster cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system 01 Safety 9 01 Correct se
388. sition Gearboxes Geartronic Manual gear positions The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox The car engine brakes when the accelerator pedal is released Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from D position to the end position at The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6 which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then see page 71 e Move the lever forwards towards plus to change up a gear and release the lever which returns to its rest position between and or e Pull the lever back towards minus to change down a gear and release it The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear in order to avoid jerking and stalling To return to automatic driving mode e Move the lever to the side to the end posi tion at D 2 Only models D5 and T6 f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or back wards in its position The information display then shifts the indication from S to show which of the gears 1 6 is engaged Geartronic Sport mode S The Sport programme provides sportier cha racteristics and allows higher engine spee
389. st To bear in mind Before the breath test In order to obtain correct function and as accu rate a measurement result as possible e Avoid eating or drinking approx 5 minutes before the breath test e Avoid excess windscreen washing the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result Change of driver In order to ensure that a new breath test is car ried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch 2 and the send button 3 simultaneously for approx 3 seconds At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop every 12 months 30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows Alcoguard Calibr required If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass func 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended tion will then be possible see page 111 sec tion Emergency situation The message can be cleared by pressing the send button 3 once Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx 2 minutes but then reap pears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop can clear the mes sage permanently Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use
390. st always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions never between left and right hand sides or vice versa If the tyres are fitted incorrectly the car s braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car to decrease the risk of skidding Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions and also the same make are fitted to all four wheels Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table see page 388 Tyre care Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged Tyres age and decompose even if they are hardly ever or never used The func tion can therefore be affected This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use Exam ples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol oration New tyres o e o e t o Tyres are perishable After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity characteristics gradually deteriorate For this reason aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them This is espe cially important with regard to winter tyres The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture This is the
391. stalk switch OK button and the button for haz ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled after which the engine can be started This function can be activated several times The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop Activating the Emergency function e Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the display shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started This function can be used once after which a reset must be made at a workshop 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Alcoguard Restart possible Alcoguard Service required Alcoguard No sig nal Alcoguard Invalid test Alcoguard Blow longer Alcoguard Blow softer i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Symbols and display messages In addition to the previously described mes sages the combined instrument panel s dis play can also show the following Display text Meaning Action The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes engine starting pos sible without new test Contact a work shop Transmission failed send manually with button 3 or take a new breath test Test failed take a new breath test Blowing too short blow for longer Blowing
392. stallation instructions care fully The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off Check that the indicator window shows green Important checks The towbar s towball must be cleaned and greased regularly If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used it is not necessary to grease the tow ball 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer 07 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer Storing the detachable towbar Specifications EZ G043769 G021485 Towbar storage space Dimensions mounting points mm D IMPORTANT 998 Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car 80 854 427 109 282 co e o o 07 Side member I BN n BEEN O Bee I Ball centre Attaching the towbar Remove the protective cover by first press ing in the catch E and then pulling the cover straight back p hr m LA N co Y x A e o Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock wise E Insert the towbar until you hear a click co co A o o G021489 Driving with a trailer G021490 G000000 EJ Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi tion Remove the key from the lock 07 During your journey 07 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer G021494 G021495 G021497 Check that the towbar is secure
393. standby mode Automatic activation parking brake In some situations Queue Assist applies the parking brake in order to keep the car station ary This takes place if e the driver opens the door or takes off his her seatbelt e DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport mode e Queue Assist has held the car stationary for more than 4 minutes e the engine is switched off e the brakes have overheated i Option accessory for more information see Introduction The radar sensor and its limitations The radar sensor is used apart from by Adap tive cruise control by the following functions as well e Collision Warning with Auto Brake see page 173 e Distance Warning see page 165 The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction in the same lane Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use 04 Driver support y Adaptive cruise control WARNING WARNING The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision Examples where the cruise control does not work optimally The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis tance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions Read the whole of this section for informa tion on the limitatio
394. ster for all calls also used for navigation among the options on the TV screen Bluetooth handsfree O Accept incoming calls confirm your selec tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing OK MENU 5 EXIT Cancels rejects phone calls deletes input characters leads up in the menu sys tem and cancels the current function If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 Remember Activate A short press on TEL activates searches last connected phone If a phone is already con nected and TEL is pressed a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for the phone The Lem symbol indicates that a phone is connected Connect an external Bluetooth device A maximum of ten external devices can be reg istered Registration is performed once per device After registration the device no longer needs to be activated as visible searchable It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected simultaneously One phone and one media device which it is possible to switch between see page 264 or see page 260 It is also possible to use the phone while streaming audio files from a connected device Connecting an external device takes place in different ways depending on whether o
395. sures must be checked every month Check tyre pressures on cold tyres Cold tyres means the tyres are the same tempera ture as the ambient temperature After several kilometres of driving the tyres warm up and the pressure increases Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con sumption shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car s roadholding Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged Tyre pres sure affects travelling comfort road noise and steering characteristics Tyre pressure decreases over time this is a natural phenomenon Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature 08 08 318 G015352 G015353 Lu Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle Take the warning triangle from the case fold out and assemble the two loose sides Fold out the warning triangle s support legs Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle Position the warning triangle in a suit able place with regard to traffic Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use If the car has been locked with privacy lock ing then the boot lid tailgate and floor hatch cannot be opened see page 49 E Option accessory for more information see Introduction 6043402 Mm M A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area General TP
396. symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources MIX Paper from responsible sources as FSC C011209 www fsc org G045580 Introduction Doo O h N Seatbelts BE o E E 16 Ix ues MERIT mS AREE 19 Aci aling meactivatmg thie airbag nascere ere eere enne nnns 22 Side Abe EAS O 1 24 Bucle EAS RTT 26 A A A mem mee PRODERIT 27 VETO Systems OY cc a saffiffrr 29 Safe mode o A 30 Child safety as Pra IE er lest ar 2j 14 Option accessory for more information see Introduction SA E El x SAFETY 01 Safety 01 16 Seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection Do not lean the backrest too far back The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position Putting on a seatbelt Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle A loud click indicates that the belt has locked 1 Certain markets Correctly fitted seatbelt G044057 Incorrectly fitted seatbelt The belt must rest on the shoulder G044055 Seatbelt height adjustment Press the button and move the belt vertically Position the belt as high as possible witho
397. t Q Rear window wiper intermittent wiping 2 Rear window wiper continuous speed Press the stalk switch forward see the arrow in the illustration above to initiate rear window washing and wiping The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats The rear window wiper works again after a cool ing period 30 seconds or longer depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 99 CD 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washing Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged If the rear window wiper is already on at con ue tinuous speed no change is made On cars with rain sensor the rear window wiper is activated with reversing if the sen sor is activated and it is raining 2 This function intermittent wiping when reversing can be deactivated Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop 03 Your driving environment CD Windows rearview and door mirrors Heat reflecting windscreen windscreen with no heat reflecting film see the highlighted area in the above illustration Laminated glass The glass is reinforced which pro i v
398. t Work it may be because the component s fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking Changing 1 Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse 2 Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown 3 If this is the case replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse This could cause signifi cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire o e e iD 3 o o Central electrical unit locations in a left hand drive car In a right hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides Engine compartment Under the glovebox Under the glovebox O Cargo area under the cargo floor O Engine compartment cold zone only Start Stop 09 Maintenance and service Engine compartment 09 Maintenance and service 09 352 General fuses engine compartment On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses Positions see preceding illustration Engine compartment upper B Engine compartment front 5 Engine compartment lower These fuses are all located in the engine com partment
399. t child seat see the following table Plies A Full size front facing child seat B Reduced size alt 1 front facing child seat B1 Reduced size alt 2 front facing child seat C Full size rear facing child seat D Heduced size rear facing child seat E Rear facing infant seat F Transverse infant seat left hand G Transverse infant seat right hand 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Never place a child in the passenger seat if If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi Volvo recommends that you contact an the car is equipped with an activated airbag cation then the car model must be included authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda on the child seat s vehicle list tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats a T TUNNN Infant seat transverse max 10 kg E X X G X X Infant seat rear facing max 10 kg E X OK IL Infant seat rear facing max 13 kg X OK IL D X OK IL IL 01 Safety 01 Child safety Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats ee T T ANN X OK Child seat rear facing 9 18 kg D IL C X OK IL Front facing child seat 9 18 kg B X OK IUF El X OK IUF A X OK IUF X The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and or size class IL Suitable for specific IS
400. t gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions 386 10 Specifications There are several reasons for increased fuel e Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel consumption compared with the table s val eration as well as braking too hard ues Examples of this are e Drive with the correct air pressure in the e The driver s driving style tyres and check this regularly select ECO tyre pressure for best results see the tyre e Ifthe customer has specified wheels larger pressure table on page 388 than those fitted as standard on the mod el s basic version then resistance increa e Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump ses tion seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer e High speed results in increased wind resis l es See further information and more advice on e Fuel quality road and traffic conditions pages 12 and 284 weather and the condition of the car See page 288 for general information on fuel Even a combination of the above mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption For further information please refer to the regulations referred to Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based To bear in min
401. ta transmission between the BLIS system s camera and the car s electri cal system returns to normal The BLIS system is deactivated Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended z Option accessory for more information see Introduction Limitations In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst Service required The following illustrations show examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within G021430 M Reflection from shiny wet road surface 04 Driver support BLIS Blind Spot Information System Own shadow on large light smooth surface e g noise barrier or concrete road surface Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera Option accessory for more information see Introduction M Menus BS Cl al SSHOesr A 200 ME SOR MERLO TROIS TEE 202 ent con a TT 210 Fuel driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater 220 ACEI OM ABMS ALC LS en OREL 223 MO O a er nati
402. tain cars with towbar fitted the towing eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket Attach the towrope in the towbar For this reason it is advisable to store the detachable towbar s towball in the car 07 During your journey Towing and recovery 07 07 During your journey Towing and recovery Recovery Call a recovery service for recovery assistance IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transpor ted with the wheels rolling forward e AnAll Wheel Drive car AWD with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km h It should not be towed further than 50 km 07 07 During your journey AN e GER M O eae Porro pae nas epesoo usa ew ee paduueeds 310 ej CA ee 314 A E Tr EL 314 Warming tr angle andMirst aid kit t 318 Tyre pressure monitoring PM een rem erret paa 319 Emergency puncture ep ARTIE er ne nr a 321 308 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WHEELS AND TYRES NE y 08 Wheels and tyres 08 Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car s driving characte ristics The type of tyre dimensions tyre pres sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs Direction of rotation co ed M A eo o The arrow shows the tyre s direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow The tyre mu
403. te control key All remote control keys can be used by differ ent drivers to store the settings for the driver s seat and door mirrors Proceed as follows e Adjust the seat as you want it e Lock the car by pressing the lock button on the remote control key that you normally n n Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment CD 03 gt gt 81 CD 03 Your driving environment use This stores the positions of the seat and door mirrors in the remote control key s memory e Unlock the car by pressing the unlock but ton on the same remote control key and open the driver s door The driver s seat 03 and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the remote control key s memory if the seat has been moved since you locked the car The key memory can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Car key memory For a description of the menu system see page 202 Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move press one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem ory buttons in order to stop the seat Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key The driver s door must then be open Risk of crushing Make sure that children do not play with the controls Check that there are no objects i
404. th deployed airbags They can make steering difficult Other safety systems may also be damaged The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation injury after intensive exposure In case of irritation wash with cold water The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns Im 01 Safety Safety mode Driving after a collision If the car is involved in a collision the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display This means that the car has reduced functionality Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col lision may have damaged any of the car s vital functions such as the fuel lines sensors for one of the safety systems or the brake system Attempting to start the car First check that no fuel is leaking from the car There must be no smell of fuel either If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage you may attempt to start the car Remove the remote control key and open the driver s door If a message is now shown to the COO effect that the ignition is on press the start button Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key The car s electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode Then try to start the car If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or t
405. th the remote control key The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in Temporary deactivation MY CAR OK MENU TUNE knob control O EXIT If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off This is carried out as follows 1 Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Reduced Guard for a detailed description of the menu system see page 202 2 Select Activate once gt The instrument panel display shows the message Reduced guard See manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked or Select Ask when exiting Eachtime the engine is switched off the centre console display screen shows the message Activate Reduced Guard until engine has started again fol lowed by the alternatives Confirm with OK and Cancel with EXIT If the deadlocks function shall be switched off Press OK MENU and lock the car Note that the alarm s movement and tilt detec tors are switched off at the same time see page 64 The next time the engine is started the system is reset to zero and the instru ment panel display shows the message Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm
406. the 55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre for example class Q can be driven at a tyre width 96 maximum of 160 km h rating is specified in the table see page 388 Tyre dimensions The dimensions are stated on all car tyres Example of designation 215 55R16 97W Traffic regulations determine how fast a car R Radial ply can be driven not the speed rating of the tyres 16 Rim diameter in inches D NOTE 97 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load tyre load index LI It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed speed rating 55 In this case Q 160 km h used only on winter tyres 270 km h T 190 km h Load index 08 H 210 km h Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load a load index Ll The car s weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres Mini 08 Wheels and tyres 08 314 Changing wheels Spare wheel The following instructions are applicable only if a spare wheel has been purchased as an optional extra with the car If the car does not have a spare wheel see page 321 for infor mation on temporary tyre sealing TMK The spare wheel Temporary spare is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos sible The car s handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel The car s ground clearance is
407. the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km h a signal sounds during the braking procedure 03 Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill e Turn the wheels away from the kerb If the car is parked facing downhill e Turn the wheels towards the kerb AN WARNING Always apply the parking brake when park ing on a slope leaving the car in gear or in P if it has automatic transmission is not suf ficient to hold the car in all situation CD 03 Your driving environment 03 Parking brake Disengaging the parking brake PUSH LOCK n o I SY e o Parking brake control release Cars with manual gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch Press the foot brake pedal down firmly Pull the control The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out 1 For a car with the Keyless system Press START STOP ENGINE The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal Volvo recom mends the use of the brake pedal Releasing automatically 1 Start the engine 2 Engage 1st gear or reverse gear 3 Easeup the clutch and depress the accel erator The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol goes out Cars with automatic gearbox Releasing manually 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch
408. the illustration for sensor loca tion page 168 Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor Remove ice and snow from the bonnet snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis play it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car This means that City Safety is not operational The Windscreen Sensors blocked message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown along with sug gestions for appropriate action The windscreen sur Clean the wind face in front of the screen surface in laser sensor is dirty front of the sensor or covered with ice from dirt ice and or snow snow Remove the block ing object The laser sensor field of vision is blocked D IMPORTANT If there are cracks scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor s windows and they cover a surface of approx 0 5 x 3 0 mm or larger then a workshop must be contacted for repair or replacement of the windscreen see the illustration for sensor location page 168 an authorised Volvo workshop is rec ommended Fa
409. the text Transm overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission see page 200 A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button Symbol Display AA ET Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con Transmission overheated Keep the car stationary using the foot brake Transmission overheated Park the car immediately in a safe manner Transmission overheated For fastest cool ing Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears Quieter and cleaner G041524 Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo ration s core values and it influences all of our operations This target orientation has resulted in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept consists of an interaction between several sep arate energy saving functions all with the common purpose of reducing fuel consump tion which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions The engine is switched off it becomes quieter and cleaner Som
410. ting switching off the engine see page 113 Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing see page 304 ig Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Key positions 03 79 CD 03 Your driving environment 03 80 Front seats G032589 Lumbar support adjustment turn the wheel Forward backward lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped als Check that the seat is locked after changing position e Raise lower front edge of seat cushion pump up down Adjust backrest rake turn the wheel 5 Raise lower the seat pump up down O Control panel for power seat 1 Also applies to power seat WARNING Adjust the position of the driver s seat before setting off never while driving Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Lowering the front seat backrest G043898 The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads 13 Move the seat as far back down as possi ble E gt Adjust the backrest to an upright position n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction ED Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward 4 Push the seat forward so that the head restraint locks in under the glovebox Raising takes place in rev
411. tion In order to change clean or lift the wiper blades for scraping off ice from the windscreen for example they must be in service position D IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the serv ice position make sure that they are not fro zen down 1 Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to set the car s elec 1 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function trical system to key position I For detailed information on key positions see page 78 2 Briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button again to set the car s electrical sys tem in key position 0 3 Within 3 seconds move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx 1 second gt The wipers then move to standing straight up The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to set the car s electrical sys tem to key position I or when the car is started IMPORTANT If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen they must be folded back down onto the wind screen before the wipers are allowed to return to their starting position This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet Once the wiper arms have been in service position the wipers must be activated and deactivated before service position can be used again Replacing the wiper blades G021760 09 Maint
412. tion accessory for more information see Introduction Audyssey MultEQ G044129 The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used in the development and tuning of the sound to ensure a world class sound experience General information on infotainment m E D AUX and USB inputs for external audio sources e g iPod yy Steering wheel keypad with without thumbwheel k TV screen The TV screen is available in two sizes 5 and 7 inch The manual shows a 7 inch TV screen Centre console control panel 2 Only applies to Performance 3 Does not apply to Performance RADIO MEDIA x 2 ABC 3 DEF 5 E G045644 G046524 Steering wheel keypad as alternative to controls in the centre console SOUND press for access to audio settings bass treble etc For more information see page 240 2 VOL turn to raise or lower the volume D ON OFF MUTE short press starts the system and long press until the screen is off switches off Note that the whole of the Sensus system including navigation and phone func tions starts switches off at the same time Briefly press to mute the sound MUTE or restore the sound if it had been switched off 1 Main sources press to select the main source e g RADIO MEDIA Last active source is shown e g FM1 If you are in MEDIA or TEL and press the main source but ton then a shortcut menu is shown with com monly used menu o
413. tion and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds irre spective of whether the engine is running then the gear selector is locked To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 78 Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor N N e Y o o If the car cannot be driven e g due to a flat battery the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved ED Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and open the hatch p Fully insert the key blade Press the key blade down and hold For information on the key blade see page 48 E Move the gear selector from the P position Automatic gearbox Powershift B D Automatic gear positions Manual gear positions Powershift is a 6 stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox con ventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter instead that transfers power from engine to gearbox Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission descri bed in the previous section Powershift or Geartronic In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmis sion this can be
414. tion system 1 Stopthe car in a safe place and turn off the engine 2 Restart the engine e f both symbols extinguish continue driving e fthe symbols remain illuminated check the level in the brake fluid reservoir see page 333 If the brake fluid level is nor mal but the symbols are still illuminated the car can be driven with great care to a workshop to have the brake system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WARNING If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi nated at the same time there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car An explan atory text is shown on the information display at the same time The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button see page 200 The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols Action 1 Stop in a safe place Do not drive the car further 2 Read the information on the information display Implement the acti
415. tions are deactivated with a remote started engine e headlamps e Position lamps e Number plate lighting e Windscreen wiper the engine is switched off The following steps switch off an ERS started engine e The remote control key s lock button 1 is depressed e The car is unlocked e A door is opened 03 Your driving environment QD Starting the engine 03 CD 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine e Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is depressed e The gear selector is moved out of P posi tion e There is less than approx 10 litres left in the fuel tank 03 e Active ERS time passes 15 minutes When an ERS started engine is switched off all direction indicators illuminate with a con stant glow for 3 seconds Symbols and messages in the display In situations where the ERS function fails or is interrupted a symbol is shown on the instru ment panel supplemented by an explanatory message Follow any recommendation given ERS function unavailable No remote start door open No remote start car not locked ERS unavailable because a door tail gate was not closed ERS unavailable because the car was not locked No remote start low battery No remote start driver in car No remote start engine warning No remote start gear not in P No remote start engine coolant ERS unavailable due to low battery volt age Charge the bat tery by starting the engine E
416. tive Cruise Control 162 Driver Alert Control 183 Lane Departure Warning 186 see Messages and symbols 139 162 Error messages in BLIS 196 Error messages in Distance Alert 167 ERS Remote Start 114 ETC electronic temperature control 214 Expectant mothers seatbelt 17 External dimensions 372 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 170 178 First aid equipment 318 HA une 318 FSU AP A 118 ATADIANOME ie 119 Fluids capacities 381 Fluids and ONS srencanceonaccesecnesenramzeesannsancnsee 381 Fog lamps i o e 91 FOOL DI AKG sisi er eee 135 FOUR C Active chassis 226 FSC environmental labelling 12 e E EA 288 fuel consumption 384 fuel economy c 317 UE Mt PP 290 FOSSES o ids raura adr 350 o NEP 355 PUSO Sueras lnea 350 box in cargo Are 358 CHAOS n niai 350 ro olo QI We ee rent 359 2 1 350 relay fuse box in engine compartment 351 PP es ons 359 11 Alphabetical Index 9 9 11 Alphabetical Index Fuse table Headlamp levelling 86 fuses in engine compartment 352 Headlamp pattern adjusting
417. to Brake amp Pedestrian Protection The collision warning system and City Safety complement each other For more information on City Safety M see page 168 1 Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially immi nent collision The collision warning system detects pedes trians stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle the driver s attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal no 1 in the illus tration on page 173 and an acoustic signal 2 Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly which may feel like a slight jolt If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented Brake support also reinforces the driver s brak ing if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision 2 With system Level 2 only 3 Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking func tion is deployed this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes Braking then takes place with full
418. tomatically Programming is carried out in the menu system in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Ensemble learn Programming can also take place as fol lows 1 Turn TUNE one step in either direction Ensemble learn is shown in the list of available channel groups 2 Press OK MENU New programming is started Programming can be cancelled with EXIT Navigation in channel group list Ensemble To navigate in and access the channel group list turn TUNE The name of the Ensemble is shown in the upper part of the TV screen When switching to the new Ensemble the name changes to the new one e Service Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo cated The list can also be filtered using the selection of programme type PTY filtering see below Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 249 06 Infotainment system Scanning The function automatically searches the cur rent wavelength for strong stations When a station is found it is played for approx 10 sec onds before scanning is resumed When a sta tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the usual way For more information on presets see Preset below Goin DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to start scanning Scanning stops if a station is saved Scanning can also be selected in DAB PTY mode In which case only channels of the pre selected programme type a
419. towing bracket must be of an approved type e If the towbar is retrofitted check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer e Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load e Increase the tyre pressure to the recom mended pressure for a full load For tyre pressure label location see page 317 e The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer e Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km e The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed e For safety reasons the maximum permit ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights e Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long steep ascents e Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12 Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car s towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for direction indica tors are broken then the combined instrument panel s symbol for directio
420. ttings Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning Warning distance The warning distance determines the system s sensitivity Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings which could be perceived as irritating in certain sit uations then change to warning distance Normal Only use warning distance Short in excep tional cases e g for dynamic driving When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the colli sion warning system is switched off The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time In order for the collision warning system to be effective always drive with the Distance Alert set at time interval 4 5 see page 165 Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations e g when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily 3 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model E Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING No automatic system can guarantee 100 correct function in all situations Therefore never test the Auto Brake system by driving at people or vehicles this may c
421. turned to their correct places after use The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space IMPORTANT The tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car s cargo area when not in use 08 Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant When driving on winter tyres the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres This gives the tyre and especially the studs a longer service life NOTE The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country Tread depth Road conditions with ice slush and low tem peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions Volvo there fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime tres Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels also applies to all wheel drive cars Never drive faster than 50 km h with snow chains Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva lent chains designed for the car model and tyre and r
422. ty Child safety Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it WARNING If the instructions regarding the two stage booster cushion are not followed then this could cause serious injury to a child in the event of an accident IMPORTANT Check that there are no loose objects e g toys left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering The booster cushion must be lowered first when lowering the backrest Child safety locks rear doors The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside For more information see page 62 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest in the outer seats The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery see pre ceding illustration Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models Consequently there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correc
423. uality system IAQS is a fully auto matic system that cleans the air in the pas senger compartment from contaminants such as particles hydrocarbons nitrous oxides and ground level ozone To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first However up to 7 5 000 km over 5 years In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must be changed at a regular service Use of tested materials in the interior equipment The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean The carpets in both the passenger com partment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo see page 363 Menu settings It is possible to activate deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate con trol system s functions via the centre console For general information about menu naviga tion see page 203 e Fan speed in automatic mode see page 216 e Recirculation timer for passenger com partment air see page 217 e Automatic rear window defrosting see page 104 e Air quality system IAQS see page 217 The climate control system s functions can be reset to the default setting
424. uard 6 Active Bending Lights w Deselect for sport mode Spin control off i MY CAR My V60 The display screen shows a grouping of all of the car s driver support systems these can be activated or deactivated here My DRIVe Parts of Volvo s DRIVe concept are described here amongst other things e Start Stop e Eco driving guide For more information see page 127 Driver support system Support systems Collision Warning Univailable m Lane Depart Warning Univailable Driver Alert Univailable G045296 MY CAR Support systems The display screen shows a summary of the current status of the car s driver support sys tems Setup menus The menus are structured as follows Menu level 1 Menu level 2 px Menu level 3 Menu level 4 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under MY CAR Settings Some menus have fur ther submenus these are then described in detail in their respective sections When selecting whether a function should be activated On or deactivated Off a square is displayed On Selected square Off Empty square e Select On Off with OK then back out of the menu with EXIT Car settings Car key memory p 81 on and 103 Off 05 Comfort and driving pleasure C9 Lock settings seat Light settings p 44 Triple indicator p 92 Automatic door locking 59 S Door lock confirmation On O light n
425. udes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides 1 Only applies to ECC Sensor location e The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard e The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel e The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror e The humidity sensor is located by the inte rior rearview mirror NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti mally the side windows and sunroof if speci fied should be closed Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function To reduce the risk of misting keep the win dows clean and use window cleaner i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Temporary shut off of the air conditioning When the engine requires full power e g for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment Condensation In warm weather condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car This is n
426. uld damage the paint work Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war ranty Water repellent coating S3 Never use products such as car wax degreaser or similar on glass surfa ces as this could ruin their water repellent properties Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers There is natural wear of the water repellent coating Treatment with a special finishing agent avail able from Volvo dealers is recommended in 362 Option accessory for more information see Introduction order to maintain the water repellent proper ties This should be used first after three years and then each year Rustproofing inspection and maintenance The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal The underbody is protected by a wear resistant anti corrosion compound A thin penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members cavities closed sections and side doors Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years After this period it should be treated at three year intervals Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is
427. uncture repair TMK You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced y e co e e e Label maximum permitted speed Switch Cable Bottle holder orange cap Protective cap 08 08 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK 9 Pressure reducing valve Sealing punctured tyres WARNING ES Air hose The sealing fluid can irritate the skin In the case of contact with skin wash away the Sealing fluid bottle fluid with soap and water Pressure gauge 3 Check that the switch is in position O and locate the cable and the air hose Do not break the bottle s seal before use The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in 4 Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle s stopper 5 Screw the bottle into its holder WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage 8 e vt o o For information on the function of the parts see preceding illustration 6 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve 1 Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit 2 Deta
428. ure in the brake system remains temporarily avail able while the driver moves his her foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for n 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction driving off with the engine having stopped automatically The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of seconds or when the driver accelerates There is more information available on HSA on page 125 Deactivating the Start Stop function In certain situations it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start Stop function this is carried out by pressing this button once at which point the button s lamp goes out Disengaged Start Stop func tion is indicated by the infor mation display s symbol going out and the message Auto Start Stop OFF being displayed for about 5 seconds while the button s lamp goes out at the same time The Start Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key Limitations The engine does not auto stop Even if the Start Stop function is activated the engine does not stop automatically if the car has not achieved M A approx 5 km h fast walking pace first after a key start or the last auto stop the driver has opened the seat M A belt s buckle the capacity of the battery is M A below the minimum permissible level the engine do
429. use 1 For information on activated deactivated airbag see page 22 CU ULLULULLL AC ULU CLUUCICCOCOCOC D OQ S 32 01 Safety Child safety Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag SRS is activated No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag SRS is activated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life Recommended child seats bag Group O max 10 kg Group 0 max 13 kg Group 0 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat max 10 kg feel Metu e child seat secured with the car s seatbelt Group 0 Type approval E1 04301146 max 13 kg U Booster cushions child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle s opening button must not be used as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen Label Airbag The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened see the illustration on page 22 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system Type approval E5 04301146 L car s seatbelt Type approval E1 04301146 U Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child seat secured with the rear facing child seat secured with the Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat
430. ut it chafing against your throat The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat Releasing the seatbelt Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract If the seatbelt does not retract fully feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose The seatbelt locks and cannot be with drawn e if it is pulled out too quickly e during braking and acceleration e if the car leans heavily 01 Safety 9 Seatbelts 01 Make sure that you correct way The diagonal section should wrap WARNING e donot use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly e ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything e thehip strap must be positioned low down not over the abdomen e tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seat belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision Each seatbelt is designed for only one per son Seatbelts and pregnancy Never modify or repair the seatbelts your self Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load such as in conjunction with a collision the entire seatbelt must be replaced Some of the protective characteristics of the seat belt may have been lost even if it app
431. utton 1 04 Driver support y Cruise control gt The symbol Yilluminates in the display 5 and the brackets around km h show that cruise control is set in standby mode To activate cruise control e Atthe required speed press the steering wheel button or gt Current speed is stored in the memory the display text km h changes to show the selected speed e g 100 km h without brackets ea Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km h Changing the speed To change the stored speed e Press briefly on the steering wheel button or most recent presses are stored in memory temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held down for more than approx 1 minute it is blocked and disabled To be able to reacti vate Cruise Control the car must be stop ped and the engine restarted Temporary deactivation standby mode To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode Press the steering wheel button Q gt Set speed is shown in brackets in the dis play 5 e g 100 km h Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if e wheels lose traction
432. verified by checking the des ignation on the transmission s label under the bonnet see page 370 The designa tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission HSA The HSA Hill Start Assist function means that the pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler ates To bear in mind The transmission s double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot e g if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate and the warning symbol illu minates and the information display shows a message The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues 10 km h or slower on an uphill gradient or with a trailer hitched The transmission cools down when the car is stationary with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead drive forward a short distance and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal D
433. vers can be pulled away by hand G044978 5 Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench until the stop position as illustrated below re O Y 2 o D IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench 6 Loosen the wheel bolts 12 1 turn anticlock wise with the wheel wrench WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack nor between the jack and the car s jacking point 7 There are two jacking points on each side of the car There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point Crank the foot of the a 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 08 319 08 08 Wheels and tyres Changing wheels jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground D IMPORTANT The ground must be firm smooth and level 8 Lift the car so that the wheel is free Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel Installation jr Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub Put on the wheel Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate G043982 Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise It is important that the wheel bolts are tight ened properly Tighten to 140 Nm Check the torque with a torque wrench Refit any full wheel covers The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during f
434. via the Bluetooth function Menus The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu naviga tion see page 238 and menu overview see page 241 Overview Centre console control panel VOL volume MEDIA button Last active source e g iPod is activated automatically If a Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia eem 06 Infotainment system source is activated and you press MEDIA then a shortcut menu is shown with com monly used menu options Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE o Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU O EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress O Short presses are used to scroll between audio files Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind audio files If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the steering wheel keypad see page 236 For a description of the remote control see page 279 n i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 259 06 Infotainment system 06 260 Media Bluetooth Getting started Connect an external Bluetooth device A maximum of ten external devices can be reg istered The conne
435. vo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum driving distance is 200 km The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced Inflating the tyres The car s original tyres can be inflated by the compressor 1 The compressor must be switched off Make sure that the switch is in position O and locate the cable and air hose 9 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot tom of the thread on the tyre s air valve Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in danger to life Never leave the engine run ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf ficient ventilation Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running 3 Connect the cable to one of the car s 12 V sockets and start the car 4 Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position l D IMPORTANT Risk of overheating The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes m Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 388 Release air using the pres sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high o Switch off the compressor Detach the air hose and cable N Refit the dust cap Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed Treat the old bottle as environ mentally hazardous waste The bottle contains 1 2 Et
436. w specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor Do not remove the laser sensor this includes removing the lenses A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825 1 Laser class 3B is not eye safe and therefore entails a risk of injury E Introduction faligo iU eio p Important information e The laser sensor s connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen e The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor s con nector is plugged in e The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi tion Il and also with the engine switched off see page 78 on key positions For more information on the laser sensor see page 168 Information on the Internet At www volvocars com there is further infor mation concerning your car To be able to read the QR code you need a QR code reader which is available as an add on for a number of mobile phones A QR code reader can be downloaded from the App Store or Android Market o A o t o o QR code 0 NES Volvo and the environment Volvo Cars environmental philosophy Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo ration s core values which influence all opera tions We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and
437. when overtaking is prohibited If a sign for both a motorway road for motor ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed HSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed iN 5 Va gt E ep gt y 7 20 C QS er 3i a 8 soo X1000 R MIN i G046282 Recorded speed information When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed the sign is displayed as a sym bol on the instrument panel 1 Road signs which are displayed in the instrument panel are dependent on the market the illustration only shows a few examples E Option accessory for more information see Introduction Together with the symbol for the current speed limit a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be dis played where appropriate IST UIII G045222 Examples of additional signs Sometimes different speed limits are signpos ted for the same road an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and or fog for example An additional sign relating to rain
438. when the driver s door is opened after the engine has been switched off Key positions For information on the remote control key s dif ferent key positions see page 78 Remote start ERS General information on ERS Remote start ERS Engine Remote Start means that the car s engine can be started remotely using the remote control key This is so that the passenger compartment can be warmed up cooled down before departure The climate control starts with the same set tings that were being used when the car was parked An ERS started engine is activated for a maxi mum of 15 minutes then it is switched off After two ERS activations the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be re used The ERS option is only available on cars with automatic gearbox Follow local national rules regulations on idling 2 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment i Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING To remote start the engine the following criteria must be met e The car must be supervised e here must be no people or animals inside the car e hecar must not be parked in a closed unventilated area the exhaust gases may seriously injure humans and ani mals Operation ou LO o Y o o Remote control buttons for remote start Locking Approach lighting Information Remote starting the e
439. whole lamp housing and withdraw it Replace the bulb Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it into place 09 Maintenance and service 09 Specification bulbs waning WA Type Vanity mirror lighting Lighting cargo area Removal of lamp lens Dipped beam 55 HI CL halogen Main beam 65 H9 Halogen Extra main 65 H9 beam ABL Front direction 21 HY21W E indicators 1 Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so i Courtesy light 3 T10 Socket a a SCORE O0 1 Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens ing front QUE ptos Replace the bulb and gently prize up the lug on the edge Glovebox light 5 Socket SV8 5 Check that the bulb illuminates and press back the lamp housing Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens ing Length 43 mm Vanity mirror 1 2 T5 Socket 3 Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb lighting W2x4 6d straight out to the side and replace with a new one Note Do not pinch hard with the Cargo area 5 Socket SV8 5 pliers Otherwise the lamp lens could then lighting Length 43 mm b hed ds Number plate 5 C5W LL Attaching the lamp lens lighting Teneo Direction indi 21 PY21W SV 2 Pressit into place cators rear gt gt 09 Maintenance and service 09 Lignina WA De Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL A Watt 09 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid Wiper blades Service position Wiper blades in service posi
440. ws the driver to voice activate certain func tions in a Bluetooth connected mobile phone or in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System The information in this section describes the use of voice commands to control a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth For detailed infor mation on using a mobile phone con nected using Bluetooth with the car s Infotainment system see page 262 The Volvo navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System has a separate user manual which contains more information on voice control and voice commands to control that sys tem Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted and instead concentrate on driving and focus attention on the road and traffic conditions The driver always holds overall responsibil ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road The voice recognition system allows the driver to voice activate certain functions of a Bluetooth connected mobile phone and in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System while the driver can keep his her hands on the wheel at the same time The input data are in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and ver bal replies from the system The voice recog nition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth handsfree system see illustra tion on page 262 and the voice recog
441. y 04 Driver support 04 178 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti vated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly e g when parking In situations where the driver demonstrates active aware driving behaviour a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Camera sensor limitations The car s camera sensor is also used as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake by the functions e Automatic main dipped beam dimming see page 88 e Road sign information see page 148 e Driver Alert Control see page 182 e Lane Departure Warning see page 185 Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor clean from ice snow mist and dirt Do not attach or fit anything to the w

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

    取扱説明書 - NTTドコモ  Prime-Line N 6776 Instructions / Assembly  20b/20p planetary gear drive service & repair manual  Istruzioni uso    TransType SE 2.5 for Windows User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file